Yamaha CVP-701 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: CVP-701

Categoría: Instrumentos musicales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

CVP

701

Reference Manual

This Reference Manual explains advanced features of this instrument that are not explained in the Owner’s Manual.

Please read the Owner’s Manual ﬁrst, before reading this Reference Manual.

2 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Contents

1 Piano Room – Enjoying Piano Performance – 3

2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 3

Voice Characteristics .........................................................3

Selecting GM&XG, MegaVoices and Other Voices

from the Panel....................................................................5

Adjusting the Depth of Reverb and Chorus for

VRM Voices .......................................................................5

Adjusting the Tuning Curve and Volume of the Key-Off

Sound for Piano Voices .....................................................6

Confirm the Assignments of Drum Kit Voices ....................7

Selecting the Harmony/Echo type......................................8

Pitch-Related Settings .......................................................9

Editing Voices (Voice Set) ...............................................12

Editing Organ Flutes Parameters.....................................17

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment

–18

Style Playback Settings ...................................................18

Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while

Playing Bass with Your Left Hand....................................21

Searching for Suitable Songs for the Current Style

(Repertoire)......................................................................22

Memorizing an Original One Touch Setting .....................23

Confirming the One Touch Setting Contents ...................23

Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) ............................24

4 Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –

Editing Music Notation Settings .......................................38

Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with

Song Playback.................................................................40

Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat settings,

Channel settings, Guide Function)...................................41

5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your

Performance via MIDI – 46

Recording Style Playback First, Then Melodies ..............46

Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) ...........................49

6 USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playback and

Recording Audio Files – 66

7 Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and

Singing Along with Your Performance – 66

Making and Saving the Microphone Settings

(Vocal/Talk)......................................................................66

8 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice,

Style, etc.) for Each Song – 69

Registering a Song, Audio or Style File (SONG/AUDIO/

STYLE) ............................................................................69

Creating a Set of Favorite Records..................................71

Editing Records................................................................72

Saving the Record as a Single File..................................73

9 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling

Custom Panel Setups – 74

Deleting or Renaming the Registration............................74

Confirming the Registration Memory Information ............75

Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) .....................76

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order

(Registration Sequence) ..................................................76

10 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal

Balance – 79

Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters ......................................79

Editing FILTER Parameters .............................................81

Editing TUNE Parameters................................................81

Editing EFFECT Parameters ...........................................82

Editing EQ Parameters ....................................................84

Selecting the Master EQ Type .........................................85

Editing Master Compressor Settings ...............................86

11 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other

Devices – 88

Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings .................................88

Wireless LAN Settings .....................................................92

MIDI Settings ...................................................................94

12 Utility / System – Making Global Settings – 100

CONFIG1 .......................................................................100

CONFIG2 .......................................................................102

PARAMETER LOCK......................................................104

USB................................................................................104

OWNER .........................................................................105

BACKUP/RESTORE......................................................105

SETUP FILES ................................................................106

RESET ...........................................................................107

Index 108

* Each chapter in this Reference Manual corresponds to the relevant chapters in the Owner’s Manual

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat dif-

ferent from those on your instrument.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Using the PDF manual

• To quickly jump to items and topics of interest, click on the desired items in the “Bookmarks” index to the left

of the main display window. (Click the “Bookmarks” tab to open the index if it is not displayed.)

• Click the page numbers that appear in this manual to go directly to the corresponding page.

• Select “Find” or “Search” from the Adobe Reader “Edit” menu and enter a keyword to locate related informa-

tion anywhere in the document.

NOTE The names and positions of menu items may vary according to the version of Adobe Reader being used.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 3

Piano Room

– Enjoying Piano Performance –

These operations are fully explained in the Owner’s Manual. Refer to the corresponding chapter in

the Owner’s Manual.

Voices

– Playing the Keyboard –

Contents

Voice Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Selecting GM&XG, MegaVoices and Other Voices from the Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Adjusting the Depth of Reverb and Chorus for VRM Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Adjusting the Tuning Curve and Volume of the Key-Off Sound for Piano Voices . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Confirm the Assignments of Drum Kit Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Selecting the Harmony/Echo type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Pitch-Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

• Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

• Scale Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

• Changing the Part Assignment of the TRANSPOSE Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Editing Voices (Voice Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

• Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

• Disabling Automatic Selection of Voice Sets (Effects, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Editing Organ Flutes Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Voice name in the Voice Selection display.

Voice Characteristics

VRM

(Virtual Resonance

Modeling)

See the Owner’s Manual, chapter 2.

Natural! Natural! Voices are high quality sounds on many specialist sampling techniques.

They are especially suited to recreating Piano and other keyboard instruments.

Live! Live! Voices feature stereo sampling, to reproduce accurately the stereo image of

an acoustic instrument, as well as the ambience of the room it was recorded in.

S.Art!

(Super Articulation)

See the Owner’s Manual, chapter 2.

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

4 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

NOTE MegaVoices are not compatible with other models even though the model may have those types of Voices installed. Any Song or Style data you’ve created

on the instrument using these Voices will not sound properly when played back on other instruments.

NOTE MegaVoices sound differently depending on the keyboard range, velocity, touch, etc. Hence, if you apply a harmony or echo effect, change the transpose

setting or change the Voice Set parameters, unexpected or undesired sounds may result.

Cool! Cool! Voices reproduce the complex characteristics of Electric Instruments, by

utilizing sophisticated programming techniques in both voicing, and the use of

DSP effects.

Sweet! Sweet! Voices are acoustic instruments which feature the sampled vibrato of the

original player, creating a far more realistic and emotional performance than

synthesized vibrato.

Drums Drum & Percussion instruments are mapped across the keyboard so you can play

them directly, or use in music production.

Live! Drums Stereo sampling is used for these high definition Drum and Percussion

instruments, which are mapped across the keyboard so you can play them directly,

or use in music production.

SFX Special percussion and sound effects are mapped across the keyboard, so you can

play them directly, or use in music production.

Live! SFX Stereo sampling is used for these high definition special percussion and sound

effects, which are mapped across the keyboard so you can play them directly, or

use in music production.

Organ Flutes! OrganFlutes! lets you create your own Organ registrations, by combining Organ

Flute Footages at different pitches, just like a real organ. See page 17 for details.

MegaVoice MegaVoice is a special Voice format designed for use in styles and songs, not for

live performance. Different velocity ranges are used to select dramatically

different playing styles simultaneously, and without changing the voice.

Actual sound maps for the MegaVoices are given in the separate Data List booklet

that comes with your instrument.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 5

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

The GM&XG Voices and MegaVoice cannot be directly called up from the VOICE category selection buttons.

However, they can be called up via panel operation by following the procedure below.

1 In the Main display, select the keyboard part to which the desired Voice is to be

assigned.

2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice Selection

display.

3 Press the [8] (UP) button to call up the Voice categories.

4 Press the [2] (P2) button to display Page 2.

5 Press the desired [A] – [J] button to call up the Voice Selection display of GM&XG

Voices, GM2 Voices, etc.

6 Select the desired Voice.

When you select a Piano Voice compatible with VRM (referred to as VRM Voices), you can adjust the depth

of the Reverb and Chorus effect that is applied to the VRM Voices.

1 Select the VRM Voice.

Press the VOICE category [PIANO] button to call up the Voice Selection display, then select a Voice

having a “VRM” indication above its name.

Selecting GM&XG, MegaVoices and Other Voices from the Panel

Adjusting the Depth of Reverb and Chorus for VRM Voices

6 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [F] VOICE SETTING → TAB [ ][ ] PIANO

3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “1. VRM/DAMPER RESONANCE DEPTH/STRING

RESONANCE DEPTH/REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH.”

4 Use the [5]/[6] buttons for adjusting the reverb depth and the [7]/[8]

buttons for the chorus depth applied to the VRM Voices.

This setting is applied commonly to all parts for which VRM Voices are selected.

You can adjust the tuning curve and volume of the key-off sound (the subtle sound that occurs when you

release a key) for Piano Voices.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [F] VOICE SETTING → TAB [ ][ ] PIANO

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “2. TUNING CURVE/KEY OFF SAMPLING DEPTH.”

Adjusting the Tuning Curve and Volume of the Key-Off Sound for

Piano Voices

CVP-701 Reference Manual 7

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

3 Use the [3] – [6] buttons to select the appropriate settings or to adjust the

value.

When you select one of the specific Drum Kit Voices below, you can confirm the key assignments in the

Drum Kit Tutor display.

Compatible Drum Kit Voices:

StandardKit1, StandardKit2, HitKit, RoomKit, RockKit, JazzKit, BrushKit, SymphonyKit, StudioKit,

PowerKit1, PowerKit2, AcousticKit, RealDrums

Call up the Drum Kit Tutor display.

Select the compatible Drum Kit Voice in the Voice Selection display → [8] MENU1 → [4] (DRUM KIT)

NOTE The Drum Kit Tutor display is not available for some Drum Kit Voices for which the “DRUM KIT” button is not available in MENU1 at the bottom of the Voice

Selection display.

In the default setting, the C3-B3 range of the keyboard is shown for confirming the assignments. When you

press a key, the instrument name assigned to the key is shown in the display. To confirm other assignments

outside that range, use the [D]/[E] or [I]/[J] buttons to shift the keyboard illustration left or right by one octave

in the display, or press a key in another octave.

[3]/

[4]

TUNING CURVE Determines the tuning curve. Select “FLAT” if you want the tuning

curve of the piano Voice to most accurately match that of other

instruments Voices.

STRETCH:

Tuning curve often employed by piano tuners to make the upper

octaves sound more natural. Best for solo piano performance.

FLAT:

Tuning curve in which the frequencies of the notes are repeated for

each octave over the entire keyboard range.

[5]/

[6]

KEY OFF SAMPLE Adjusts the volume of the key-off sound.

Confirm the Assignments of Drum Kit Voices

8 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

This function lets you apply harmonies to your right hand performance according to the chords you play with

your left hand, and trigger automatic echo or tremolo even by pressing a single note or two notes.

1 Press the [VOICE EFFECT] button.

2 Turn the Keyboard Harmony on by pressing the [I] (KEYBOARD HARMONY) button.

3 Call up the operation display by pressing the [J] (TYPE SELECT) button.

4 Use the [1] – [3] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo type.

The Harmony/Echo types are divided into the following groups, depending on the particular effect applied.

 Harmony Types

When one of the Harmony Types is selected, the Harmony effect is applied to the note played in the right-

hand section of the keyboard according to the type selected above and the chord specified in the chord

section of the keyboard shown below.

If you want to use these Types, play back the style or set the “STOP ACMP” parameter (page 19) to a

setting other than “DISABLED.”

Selecting the Harmony/Echo type

Harmony Types

These types apply the harmony effect to notes played in the right-hand section of the

keyboard according to the chord specified in the left-hand section of the keyboard.

(Note that the “1+5” and “Octave” settings are not affected by the chord.)

Multi Assign Type

This type applies a special effect to chords played in the right-hand section of the

keyboard.

Echo Types

These types apply echo effects to notes played in the right-hand section of the

keyboard in time with the currently set tempo.

Split Point

(for the Voice)

LEFT Voice and chord section

for Harmony effect

RIGHT 1 and 2 Voices

Chord section for Style playback

and Harmony effect

Chord section for Style playback

and Harmony effect

Split Point

(for Style playback)

Split Point

LEFT Voice

RIGHT 1 and 2

Voices

CVP-701 Reference Manual 9

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

 Multi Assign Type

The Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of

the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). Both keyboard parts [RIGHT 1] and [RIGHT 2] should be turned

on when using the Multi Assign effect. The Right 1 and Right 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the

notes in the order you play.

 Echo Types

When one of the Echo Types is selected, the corresponding effect (echo, tremolo, trill) is applied to the

note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo, regardless of the

[ACMP ON/OFF] and the LEFT part on/off status. Keep in mind that Trill only works when you hold

down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously (last two notes if more than two notes are held), and it

plays those notes alternately.

5 Use the [4] – [8] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo settings.

The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type.

Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument

You can fine-tune the pitch of the entire instrument — a useful feature when playing the Clavinova along with

other instruments or CD music. Please note that the Tuning function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit

Voices with name “*** kit” and audio files.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 → [E] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [ ][ ]

MASTER TUNE

2 Use the [4]/[5] buttons to set the tuning in 0.2 Hz steps, from 414.8–466.8 Hz.

Press the both 4 or 5’s [



] and [



] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the factory setting of 440.0 Hz.

[4] VOLUME This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi

Assign.” It determines the level of the harmony/echo notes generated by

the Harmony/Echo effect.

[5] SPEED This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected

in Type above. It determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill

effects.

[6] ASSIGN This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi

Assign.” This lets you determine the keyboard part via which the har-

mony/echo notes will be sounded.

[7] CHORD NOTE

ONLY

This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected.

When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to notes

(played in the right-hand section of the keyboard) that belong to a chord

played in the chord section of the keyboard.

[8] TOUCH LIMIT This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi

Assign.” It determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony

note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your

playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the melody. The

harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set

value).

Pitch-Related Settings

10 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

Scale Tuning

You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for specific historical periods or music genres.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [E] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [ ][ ]

SCALE TUNE

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale.

 Preset Scale types

EQUAL The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each

half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in

music today.

PURE MAJOR, PURE

MINOR

These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially

for triad chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal

harmonies — such as choirs and a cappella singing.

PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a

series of perfect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this

tuning is slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for

some leads.

MEAN-TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making

the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th

century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale.

WERCKMEISTER,

KIRNBERGER

This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems,

which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean

scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique

character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and

Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the

harpsichord.

ARABIC1, ARABIC2 Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.

The tuning of each note for the

currently selected scale is shown.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 11

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

3 Change the following settings as necessary.

NOTE

To register the Scale Tune settings to the Registration Memory, be sure to checkmark the SCALE item in the REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS display.

NOTE If a VRM Voice is selected as the RIGHT1 part, the resonance of all VRM Voices is set to the same scale type as that of the RIGHT1 part. If a Voice other

than a VRM Voice is selected as the RIGHT1 part, the resonance of any other VRM Voices is set to “Equal.”

Changing the Part Assignment of the TRANSPOSE Buttons

You can determine to which part (keyboard, Song or both) the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons are applied. This

lets you transpose the pitch of the keyboard but not that of the Song (or vice versa) — allowing you to play

along with a Song in a more comfortable key, for example.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 → [D] CONTROLLER → TA B [ ][ ] KEYBOARD/PANEL

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “2. TRANSPOSE ASSIGN.”

3 Press the [4]/[5] buttons to select the desired transpose type.

You can confirm the setting here by viewing the pop-up window called up via the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons.

[2] BASE NOTE Determines the base note for each scale. When the base note is changed,

the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch

relationship between the notes.

[3] –

[5]

TUNE Select the desired note to be tuned by using the [3] buttons and tune

it in cents by using the [4]/[5] buttons.

NOTE In musical terms a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone. (100 cents equal one semitone.)

[6]/

[7]

PART SELECT Select the part to which the Scale Tune setting is applied by using the

[6]/[7] buttons. Then press the [8] button to add a check-

mark or press the [8] button to remove the checkmark.

[8] MARK ON/OFF

KEYBOARD When this is selected, the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect the pitch of key-

board played Voices and Style playback (controlled by the performance in the

chord section of the keyboard) — but they do not affect Song playback.

SONG When this is selected, the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect only the pitch of

Song playback.

MASTER When this is selected, the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect the overall pitch

of the instrument, except audio playback.

12 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

The instrument has a Voice Set feature that allows you to create your own Voices by editing some parameters

of the existing Voices. Once you’ve created a Voice, you can save it as a User Voice to the USER drive or

external devices for future recall.

1 Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ Flutes Voice).

Organ Flutes Voices have a different editing method than described here. For instructions on editing the

Organ Flutes Voices, see page 17.

2 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as

necessary.

3 Press the [5] (VOICE SET) button to call up the VOICE SET display.

4 Use the TAB [ ][ ] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.

For information on the available parameters in each display, see the “Editable Parameters in the VOICE

SET Displays” on page 13.

5 As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) to be edited and

edit the Voice by using the [1] – [8] buttons.

By pressing the [D] (COMPARE) button, you can compare the sound of the edited Voice with the original

(unedited) Voice.

6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.

For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

The settings will be lost if you select another Voice or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.

Editing Voices (Voice Set)

CVP-701 Reference Manual 13

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays

The Voice Set parameters are organized into several different displays. The parameters in each display are

described separately, below.

NOTE The available parameters differ depending on the Voice.

 COMMON Page

[1] VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice.

[2]/

[3]

TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the touch sensitivity (velocity sensitivity), or how greatly the

volume responds to your playing strength.

DEPTH

Determines the velocity sensitivity, or how much the level of the Voice

changes in response to your playing strength (velocity).

OFFSET

Determines the amount by which received velocities are adjusted for the

actual velocity effect.

[4]/

[5]

PART OCTAVE Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves. When

the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1–2 parts, the R1/R2

parameter is available; when the edited Voice is used as the LEFT part,

the LEFT parameter is available.

[6] MONO/POLY Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or poly-

phonically.

[7] PORTAMENTO

TIME

Sets the portamento time (pitch transition time) when the edited Voice is

set to “MONO” above.

NOTE The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Portamento is a function that creates a

smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next.

64 127

127

64 127

127

Actual Velocity for

tone generator

Depth = 127 (twice)

Depth = 64 (normal)

Depth = 32 (half)

Depth = 0

TOUCH SENSE DEPTH

Changes to velocity curve according to

VelDepth (with Offset set to 64)

Received Velocity

(Actual KeyOn speed)

TOUCH SENSE OFFSET

Changes to velocity curve according to

VelOffset (with Depth set to 64)

Actual Velocity for

tone generator

Received Velocity

(Actual KeyOn speed)

Offset = 96 (+64)

Offset = 127 (+127)

Offset = 64 (normal)

Offset = 32 (-64)

Offset = 0 (-127)

Depends

on offset

Depends

on offset

14 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

 CONTROLLER Page

1 CENTER PEDAL

2 LEFT PEDAL

These allow you to select the function to be assigned to the center or left pedal.

3 MODULATION

When a pedal function is assigned to MODULATION, the pedal can be used to modulate the parameters

below as well as the pitch (vibrato). Here, you can set the degree to which the pedal modulates each of the

following parameters.

 SOUND Page

FILTER

Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking or passing a specific

frequency range. The parameters below determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a

certain frequency range. In addition to making the sound either brighter or mellower, Filter can be used to

produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects.

[1] FUNCTION Selects the function to be assigned to the center or left pedal. For details

on the pedal functions, see page 88.

[2] –

[8]

RIGHT 1,

RIGHT 2, LEFT,

etc.

Determines whether the assigned function is effective or not for the

respective keyboard part. This also determines the depth for the

function. For details, see page 88.

[2] FILTER Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter cutoff

frequency. For details about the filter, see page 14.

[3] AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude (vol-

ume).

[5] LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the pitch, or the

vibrato effect.

[6] LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter modula-

tion, or the wah effect.

[7] LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude, or

the tremolo effect.

[1]BRIGHT

(Brightness)

Determines the cutoff frequency or

effective frequency range of the fil-

ter (see diagram). Higher values

result in a brighter sound.

[2] HARMO.

(Harmonic

content)

Determines the emphasis given to

the cutoff frequency (resonance),

set in BRIGHT. above (see dia-

gram). Higher values result in a

more pronounced effect.

Volume

These frequencies are

“passed” by the filter.

Cutoff

range

Frequency

(pitch)

Cutoff Frequency

Volume

Frequency (pitch)

Resonance

CVP-701 Reference Manual 15

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the

sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound

characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick

attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a

sustained piano tone.

VIBRATO

Vibrato is a quavering, vibrating sound effect that is produced by

regularly modulating the pitch of the Voice.

 EFFECT/EQ Page

1 REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/DSP DEPTH/VIB ROTOR

[3] ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the

key is played. The lower the value, the quicker the attack.

[4] DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly

lower level than maximum). The lower the value, the quicker the decay.

[5] RELES.

(Release)

Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is

released. The lower the value, the quicker the decay.

[6] DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a

more pronounced Vibrato.

[7] SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect.

[8] DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key

and the start of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of

the Vibrato onset.

[1]/

[2]

REVERB

DEPTH

Adjusts the reverb depth. The setting cannot be changed when a

VRM Voice is selected.

[3]/

[4]

CHORUS

DEPTH

Adjusts the chorus depth. The setting cannot be changed when a

VRM Voice is selected.

[5] DSP ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP is on or off.

[6] DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP depth.

If you want to re-select the DSP type, you can do so in the “2 DSP”

menu explained on page 16.

[7] VIBE ROTOR This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected for the DSP Type

parameter explained on page 16. Determines whether VibeRotor

should be set to on or off when selecting the Voice.

Time

Level

Key on Key off

Sustain

Level

ATTACK DECAY RELEASE

Pitch

DELAY

SPEED

DEPTH

Time

16 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

2 DSP

3 EQ

Determines the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands. For information about EQ, refer to

page 84.

 HARMONY Page

Harmony sets the Right 1 and 2 parts together. Before you set these parameters, make sure the Right 1 part

is selected in the Main display. This has the same settings as the display of “Selecting the Harmony/Echo

type” page 8 in step 3.

Disabling Automatic Selection of Voice Sets (Effects, etc.)

Each Voice is linked to its default VOICE SET parameter settings. Usually these settings are automatically

called up when a Voice is selected. However, you can also disable this feature by the operation in the relevant

display as explained below.

For example, if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony effect, set the KEYBOARD

HARMONY parameter to OFF (in the display explained below).

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [F] VOICE SETTING → TAB [ ][ ] VOICE SET FILTER

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a keyboard part.

3 Use the [4] – [8] buttons to enable/disable automatic calling up of the settings

(ON or OFF) independently for each parameter group.

[1] –

[4]

DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type. Select the desired category

first, then a type.

[6] VARI. A Variation parameter is provided for each DSP type. By turning this

on or off, you can instantly and significantly change the sound of the

DSP effect. Here, you can edit the VARI. (Variation) on/off status and

the parameter value for each status (in DETAIL below).

[5]/

[7]

DETAIL Calls up the detailed setting display. Press the [5] button for edit-

ing the standard parameter value, and the [7] button for editing

the Variation parameter value.

In the detailed setting display, select the desired parameter by using

the [2] – [4] buttons then adjust the value by using the

[5] – [6] buttons. This differs depending on the effect type

and cannot be changed. Press the [EXIT] button to close the setting

display.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 17

Voices – Playing the Keyboard –

The Organ Flute Voices selected from the [ORGAN FLUTES] button can be edited by adjusting the footage

levers, adding the attack sound, applying effects and equalizer, etc.

NOTICE

After editing, go to the Voice Selection display by pressing the [I] (PRESETS) button and save the setting. The settings will be lost if you

select another Voice or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.

 FOOTAGE Page

Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 2.

 VOLUME/ATTACK Page

 EFFECT/EQ Page

Same parameters as in the VOICE SET “EFFECT/EQ” Page explained on page 15.

Editing Organ Flutes Parameters

[1] VOL (Volume) Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic

bar, the greater the volume.

[2]RESP

(Response)

Affects both the attack and release (page 15) portion of the sound,

increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and

release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value, the

slower the swell and release.

[3] VIB. SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the VIBRATO

ON/OFF ([F]/[G] buttons) and VIBRATO DEPTH ([H] button).

[4] MODE The MODE control selects one of two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the

FIRST mode, attack (percussive sound) is applied only to the first notes

played and held simultaneously; while the first notes are held, any sub-

sequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode,

attack is applied equally to all notes.

[5] –

[7]

4', 2 2/3', 2' These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE

Voice. The 4', 2-2/3' and 2' controls increase or reduce the volume of

attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the graphic bar,

the greater the attack sound volume.

[8] LENG (Length) Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter

decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar,

the longer the decay.

Same as the FOOTAGE

Page.

18 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Styles

– Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Contents

Style Playback Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with Your Left Hand. . . . . . . . . .21

Searching for Suitable Songs for the Current Style (Repertoire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Memorizing an Original One Touch Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Confirming the One Touch Setting Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

• Realtime Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

• Step Recording (Inputting events one by one). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

• Style Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

• Editing the Rhythmic Feel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

• Editing Data for Each Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

• Making Style File Format Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

The instrument has a variety of Style playback functions which can be accessed in the display below.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [G] STYLE SETTING

2 Use the [1] – [8] and [B]/[C]/[F] buttons for each setting.

Style Playback Settings

CVP-701 Reference Manual 19

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

[B] OTS LINK

TIMING

This applies to the OTS Link function. This parameter determines the

timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the MAIN VARIA-

TION [A] – [D] change. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.)

REAL TIME

One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a MAIN

VA R I AT I O N b u t t o n .

NEXT BAR

One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a

MAIN VARIATION button.

[C] STOP ACMP When the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is on, [SYNC START] is off, and this

parameter is set to the value other than “DISABLED,” you can play

chords in the chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped, and

still hear the accompaniment chord. In this condition — called “Stop

Accompaniment” — any valid chord fingerings are recognized and the

chord root/type are shown in the display. Here, you can determine

whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the

Stop Accompaniment status.

DISABLED

Disables the Stop Accompaniment feature. When Style playback is

stopped, any pressed notes in the chord section of the keyboard will not

be recognized as chords.

OFF

The chord played in the chord section will not sound.

STYLE

The chord played in the chord section will sound via the Voices for the

Pad part and the Bass channel of the selected Style.

FIXED

The chord played in the chord section will sound via the specified Voice,

regardless of the selected Style.

NOTE When the selected Style contains MegaVoices, unexpected sounds may result when this is set to

“STYLE.”

NOTE When you record a song, the chord detected by playing the Stop Accompaniment can be recorded

regardless of the setting here. Please note that both the Voice that is sounded and the chord data

will be recorded when set to “STYLE,” and only the chord data will be recorded when set to “OFF”

or “FIXED.”

NOTE When this is set to “DISABLED,” chords are not recognized while the Style is stopped. This is why

Keyboard Harmony (page 8) is not applied even if you play a chord in the chord section of the key-

board while the Style is stopped.

[F] ACMP ON/OFF

DEFAULT

Determines whether the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is on or off when the

power is turned on.

[1]/

[2]

DYNAMICS

CONTROL

This determines how the Style playback volume changes depending on

the playing strength.

•WIDE........... The volume changes over a wide range.

•MEDIUM..... The volume changes over a medium range.

• NARROW .... The volume changes over a narrow range.

•OFF.............. The volume is kept the same regardless of playing

strength.

20 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

[3]/

[4]

SYNCHRO

STOP

WINDOW

This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop

function is automatically cancelled. When the [SYNC STOP] button is

turned on and this is set to a value other than “OFF,” the Synchro Stop

function is automatically cancelled if you hold a chord for longer than the

time set here. This conveniently resets Style playback control to normal,

letting you release the keys and still have the Style play. In other words, if

you release the keys sooner than the time set here, the Synchro Stop func-

tion works.

[5]/

[6]

SECTION SET Determines the default section that is automatically called up when

selecting different Styles (when Style playback is stopped). When set to

“OFF” and Style playback is stopped, the active section is maintained

even if the different Style is selected. When any of the MAIN A – D sec-

tions is not included in the Style data, the nearest section is automatically

selected. For example, when MAIN D is not contained in the selected

Style, MAIN C will be called up.

[7] TEMPO This determines whether the tempo changes or not when you change

Styles. If you want to avoid changing the tempo when selecting another

Style, select LOCK or HOLD.

LOCK

The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained.

HOLD

The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained while Style is

played back and another Style is selected. While Style playback is

stopped and another Style is selected, the tempo changes to that of the ini-

tial default tempo for the selected Style.

RESET

The tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected

Style.

[8] PART ON/OFF This determines whether the on/off status of the Style Channels (Parts)

changes or not when you change Styles. If you want to avoid changing

the Style Channel On/Off status when selecting another Style, select

LOCK or HOLD.

LOCK

The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained.

HOLD

The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained

while Style is played back and another Style is selected. While Style

playback is stopped and another Style is selected, all Style Channels are

set to On.

RESET

All Style Channels are set to On.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 21

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

By changing the Chord Detection area from the left-hand section to the right-hand section, you can play the

bass line with your left hand while using your right hand to control Style playback.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 → [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB [ ][ ]

SPLIT POINT

2 Set the CHORD DETECTION AREA value to “UPPER” with the [1]/[2] buttons.

3 Press the [E] button to turn the MANUAL BASS function on.

With this setting, the whole right-hand (UPPER) section works as the Chord section as well as melody

performance. In this condition, note the following points:

• In the right-hand (UPPER) section, you can specify the chord type as you play the melody.

• The Bass Part Voice of the current Style is assigned to the Keyboard LEFT part. This is referred to as the

Manual Bass function, which can be turned off or on via the [E] button.

• Chord Fingering is set to a special type (“FINGERED*”) automatically, in which you should press three or

more notes simultaneously for specifying the chord. Pressing two or fewer notes does not change the chord

type.

• Split Point (STYLE) is unavailable.

Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass

with Your Left Hand

Split Point (STYLE) Split Point (LEFT)

LEFT Voice section

(LOWER section)

RIGHT 1, 2 Voices section

(UPPER section)

Chord Section

22 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

You can search for music pieces and songs that are most suitable for playing with the current Style by using

the Repertoire function. You can automatically call up appropriate settings such as Voice, effect and pedal by

selecting the desired music piece.

NOTE The settings shown here are Music Finder Records. You can choose additional settings by using the Music Finder feature.

1 Select the desired Style from the Style Selection display.

2 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as

necessary.

3 Press the [4] (REPERTOIRE) button.

Various appropriate panel settings matching the selected Style will be shown in the display.

4 Use the [2] – [3] buttons to select the desired panel setting.

NOTE Depending on the particular selected Style, there may not be any panel settings in the Repertoire function.

Searching for Suitable Songs for the Current Style (Repertoire)

Before using the Repertoire function, you need to import Music Finder records (see instructions described

in the Owner's Manual, chapter 8).

CVP-701 Reference Manual 23

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

While the panel settings appropriate for each preset Style are pre-programmed as One Touch Settings, you

can also register your favorite settings to create original One Touch Settings. Because the One Touch Setting

data is included in a Style, the Save operation will be done as a Style on the Style Selection display.

1 Select the desired Style to correspond to your One Touch Setting.

2 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, effects, and so on) as desired.

3 Press the [MEMORY] button in the REGISTRATION MEMORY section.

4 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons.

A message appears in the display prompting you to save the panel settings.

5 Press [G] (YES) button to call up the Style Selection display and save the panel

settings as a Style file.

NOTICE

The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without executing the Save

operation.

You can check the information of the One Touch Setting [1] – [4] assigned to currently selected Style.

1 In the Style Selection display, call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by

pressing the [8] button as necessary, then press the [6] (OTS INFO) button to call

up the Information display.

NOTE You can also call up the Information display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button then pressing one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons.

2 Press the [F] (CLOSE) button to close the Information display.

Memorizing an Original One Touch Setting

Confirming the One Touch Setting Contents

24 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Styles are made up of fifteen different sections (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) and each section has eight separate

channels. With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately recording the channels, or by

importing pattern data from other existing Styles.

You can use one of the three different methods described below to create a Style. The created Style can also

be edited.

• Realtime Recording This method lets you record the Style by simply playing the keyboard. See

page 25.

• Step Recording This method lets you to enter each note individually. See page 28.

• Style Assembly This method lets you create a composite Style by combining various patterns

from the internal preset Styles or from Styles you have already created. See

page 28.

Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 → [A] STYLE CREATOR

NOTE The Style files created on this instrument can only be played back on instruments which are compatible with SFF GE.

There are several Pages (tabs) in the Style Creator display.

•BASIC Creates the basic settings of the Style. You can also record your performance in real-

time to create a new Style (Realtime Recording). See page 25.

• ASSEMBLY Mixes the various parts (channels) from preset Styles or already created Styles to cre-

ate a new Style. See page 28.

•GROOVE

Changes the rhythmic feel of your created Style. See page 30.

• CHANNEL Edits data for each channel — quantizing, changing velocity, etc. See page 32.

• PARAMETER Changes the settings related for Style File Format. See page 33.

•EDIT Lets you enter notes one by one to create an original Style (Step Recording). See

page 28.

Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator)

Sections

Channels

CVP-701 Reference Manual 25

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Realtime Recording

In the BASIC Page, you can create a single Style by recording the individual channels one-by-one, using

realtime recording.

1 When you want to create a Style based on an existing Style, select the desired Style to

serve as the basis for recording/editing before calling up the Style Creator display.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TA B [ ][ ] MENU2 → [A] STYLE CREATOR

The BASIC Page is shown.

3 If you want to create a new Style from scratch, press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button to

delete the data of all channels.

4 Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new Style.

First close the RECORD display by pressing the [EXIT] button. Then use the [3]/[4] buttons to

select the section to be recorded.

NOTE To call up the RECORD display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button.

NOTE You can specify the sections to be recorded by using the Section buttons on the panel. Refer to step 3 on page 28.

NOTE You cannot select INTRO 4 and ENDING 4 sections directly via panel operations.

Realtime Recording Characteristics — Loop Recording and Overdub Recording

• Loop Recording

Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a “loop,” and Style recording is also

done using loops. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two

measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop),

letting you record while hearing previously recorded material.

• Overdub Recording

This method records new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the

original data. In Style recording, the recorded data is not deleted, except when using functions such as

Rhythm Clear (page 27) and Delete (page 26).

For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two measures are repeated

many times. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new

material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material.

When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style, overdub recording is applied only to the

rhythm channels. For all other channels (except rhythm), you need to delete the original data before

recording.

5-2

5-14

26 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

5 Use the [5]/[6] buttons to determine the length (number of measures) of the

selected section, then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the specified

length.

6 Specify the channel to be recorded by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH)

button and pressing the appropriate numbered button, [1] – [8].

To cancel the selection, press the corresponding [1] – [8] button again.

7 Call up the Voice Selection display by using the [1] – [8] buttons and select the

desired Voice for the corresponding recording channels.

Press the [EXIT] button to close the Voice Selection display.

8 If necessary, delete a channel by simultaneously holding down the [J] (DELETE)

button and pressing the appropriate numbered button, [1] – [8].

You can cancel the deletion by pressing the same numbered button again before releasing your finger from

the [J] button.

NOTE When recording channels BASS–PHR2 based on an existing Style, you have to delete the original data before recording.

Recordable Voices

• RHY1 channel

Any except your original Organ Flute and Super Articulation Voices are recordable.

• RHY2 channel

Only drum/SFX kits are recordable.

• BASS–PHR2 channels

Any except your original Organ Flute, drum/SFX kits and Super Articulation Voices are recordable.

NOTE Preset Organ Flute Voices can be recorded to the RHY1 and BASS–PHR2 channels.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 27

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

9 Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button.

Playback of the specified section starts. Since the accompaniment pattern plays back repeatedly in a loop,

you can record individual sounds one by one, listening to the previous sounds as they play. For

information on recording to channels other than the rhythm channels (RHY1, 2), refer to the section

“Rules when recording non-rhythm channels” below.

NOTE You can turn off the desired channels by pressing the corresponding [1] – [8] buttons.

To continue recording with another channel, repeat steps 6 – 9.

Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button.

Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display.

Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.

For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.

Deleting recorded notes in the rhythm channel

When you are recording the rhythm channel (RHY1 or RHY2), you can delete a specific instrument

sound by simultaneously holding down the [E] (RHY CLEAR) button and pressing the appropriate key

on the keyboard.

Rules when recording non-rhythm channels

• Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE channels (i.e., C, D, E, G,

A, and B).

• Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD channels (i.e., C, E, G, and B).

Using the data recorded here, the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is appropriately converted

depending on the chord changes you make during your performance. The chord which forms the basis for

this note conversion is called the Source Chord, and is set by default to CM7 (as in the example

illustration above).

You can change the Source Chord (its root and type) from the PARAMETER display on page 34. Keep in

mind that when you change the Source Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes

and recommended notes will also change. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see

page 34.

NOTE For the INTRO and ENDING sections, any desired chord or chord progression can be used.

CRC CRC

C = Chord note

C, R = Recommended note

28 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Step Recording (Inputting events one by one)

In the EDIT Page, you can record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step Recording procedure is

essentially the same as that for Song Recording (page 50) with the exception of the points listed below:

• In the Song Creator, the End Mark position can be changed freely; in the Style Creator, it cannot be changed.

This is because the length of the Style is automatically fixed, depending on the selected section. For exam-

ple, if you create a Style based on a section of four measures length, the End Mark position is automatically

set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display.

• Recording channels can be changed in the Song Creator 1-16 tab display; however, they cannot be changed

in the Style Creator. Select the recording channel in the BASIC tab display.

• In the Style Creator, the channel data can be entered and System Exclusive data can be edited (delete, copy,

or move). You can switch between the two by pressing the [F] button. However, Chord, Lyrics, and System

Exclusive data cannot be entered.

For instructions on Step Recording, refer to pages 50 – 53. For information on the EDIT display (Event List

display), refer to page 63.

Style Assembly

Style Assembly allows you to create a single Style by mixing the various patterns (channels) from existing

internal Styles.

1 Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing before calling up

the Style Creator display.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 → [A] STYLE CREATOR → TAB [ ][ ] ASSEMBLY

3 Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new Style.

First call up the SECTION Selection display by pressing one of the Section buttons (INTRO, MAIN,

ENDING, etc.) on the panel. Then change the section as desired by using the [6]/[7] buttons and

actually enter the selection by pressing the [8] (OK) button.

NOTE You cannot select INTRO 4 and ENDING 4 sections directly via panel operations.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 29

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

4 Select the channel for which you wish to replace the pattern by using the [A] – [D] and

[F] – [I] buttons. Call up the Style Selection display by pressing the same button again.

Select the Style containing the pattern you want to replace in the Style Selection

display.

To return to the previous screen, press the [EXIT] button after selecting the Style.

5 Select the desired section of the newly imported Style (chosen in step 4) by using the

[2]/[3] (SECTION) buttons.

6 Select the desired channel for the section (chosen in step 5) by using the [4]/

[5] (CHANNEL) buttons.

Repeat steps 4 – 6 above to replace the patterns of other channels.

7 Press the [J] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.

For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.

Playing the Style During Style Assembly

While you are assembling a Style, you can play back the Style (to check the sound of your edits) and

conveniently select the method of playback. Use the [6]/[7] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in the Style

Assembly display to select the playback method.

•SOLO

Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. Any channels set to ON in the RECORD

display on the BASIC Page are played back simultaneously.

•ON

Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. Any channels set to other than OFF in the

RECORD display on the BASIC Page are played back simultaneously.

•OFF

Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page.

[A] – [D],

[F] – [I]

buttons

30 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Editing the Rhythmic Feel

1 In the GROOVE Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu, then edit the

data by using the [1] – [8] buttons.

1 GROOVE

This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing

(clock) of the Style. The Groove settings are applied to all channels of the selected Style.

[1]/

[2]

ORIGINAL

BEAT

Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other

words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if

“12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.

[3]/

[4]

BEAT

CONVERTER

Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL

BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIG-

INAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all

8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A”

and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set

to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.

[5]/

[6]

SWING Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depend-

ing on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the speci-

fied ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat”, the Swing parameter will

selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create

a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of

swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pro-

nounced.

[7]/

[8]

FINE Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected sec-

tion. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while

“HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered set-

tings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to

the specified beat — but not including the first beat — will be played

early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In

all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium

effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 31

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

2 DYNAMICS

This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in the Style playback. The Dynamics settings

can be applied individually to each channel or globally to all channels of the selected Style.

2 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display.

After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if

you are not satisfied with the Groove or Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the

previous operation can be undone.

3 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.

For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.

[1]/

[2]

CHANNEL Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied.

[3]/

[4]

ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied — in other words, which notes in

the part(s) are emphasized with the Dynamics settings.

[6] STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be

applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect.

[7] EXPAND/

COMP.

Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. Values higher than

100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% com-

press it.

[8] BOOST/CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values

above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce

it.

32 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

Editing Data for Each Channel

1 In the CHANNEL Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu.

1 QUANTIZE

Same as in the Song Creator (page 61), with the exception of the two additional available parameters

below.

2 VELOCITY CHANGE

Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel, according to the percentage specified here.

3 BAR COPY

This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within

the specified channel.

4 BAR CLEAR

This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel.

5 REMOVE EVENT

This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel.

2 Use the [1]/[2] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited.

The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display.

3 Use the [4] – [8] buttons to edit the data.

4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display.

After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if

you are not satisfied with the results of the edit. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous

operation can be undone.

[4] TOP Specifies the first (TOP) and last (LAST) measures in the region to be

copied.

[5]LAST

[6] DEST Specifies the first measure of the destination location, to which the data is

to be copied.

Eighth notes with swing

Sixteenth notes with swing

CVP-701 Reference Manual 33

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.

For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.

Making Style File Format Settings

The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into

a single unified format. By using the Style Creator, you can take advantage of the power of the SFF format

and freely create your own Styles.

The chart shown below indicates the process by which the Style is played back. (This does not apply to the

rhythm track.) These parameters can be set via the Style Creator feature, in the PARAMETER Page.

Chord changes via the chord section of the keyboard.

Output

This instrument’s Styles are compatible with SFF GE — an enhanced format of the original SFF with

especially rich, expressive guitar parts.

NOTE The Style files created on this instrument can only be played back on instruments which are compatible with SFF GE.

Source Pattern settings — SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/CHORD (page 34)

The Style data is appropriately converted depending on chord changes you make during your

performance. You can create the “Source Pattern” with the Style Creator, which determines how the

played chord will be converted. Here the “Source Chord” (page 34) can be set, allowing you to record

accompaniment channels.

Note Transposition settings — NTR and NTT (page 35)

This parameter group features two parameters that determine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to

be converted in response to chord changes.

Other settings — HIGH KEY, NOTE LIMIT and RTR (page 37)

Using the parameters of this group, you can fine-tune how Style playback responds to the chords you

play. For example, the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the Voices of the Style sound as realistic

as possible by shifting the pitch to an authentic range — ensuring that no notes sound outside the natural

range of the actual instrument (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds).

34 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

1 In the PARAMETER Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu.

For details of the edit menu, see page 34.

2 Use the [1]/[2] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited.

The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display.

3 Use the [3] – [8] buttons to edit the data.

For details on editable parameters, see pages 34 – 37.

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.

For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.

1 SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/CHORD

These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the

pattern). When you change Source Root/Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes

and recommended notes will also change, depending on the newly selected chord type.

NOTE When NTR is set to “Root Fixed,” NTT is set to “Bypass” and NTT BASS is set to “OFF,” the “Source Root” and “Source Chord” parameters are changed

to “Play Root” and “Play Chord,” respectively. In this case, you can change chords and hear the resulting sound for all channels.

NOTE SOURCE ROOT/CHORD is not applied when NTR is set to GUITAR.

CRC CR CRC C RC CRC C CR CRC C CR

CCC CR

CCC C CR CCC C RC

CRC

RCR

CR CR

CR CCR

CCR

RRCCC

CC RC

CR CC

CR C CR

CC RC C

CCR

CR R RC

CCR

CCC

CRC

CCC C

CRC CR

CRC CC

CCC

CCCR

RCC

CCC

RCC

CRC CRR

CRC

RCC

CCCR CC CCR CR

CMaj

(9)

Caug

7 7

♭

(9)

(11)

CmM

(9)

Cdim

(9)

(13)

(

♭

)

Csus

1+8

1+5

♭

Cmadd

♯

(

♯

)

C aug

CM aug

C sus

Cadd

(

♭

)

Csus

When the Source Root is C:

C = Chord notes

C, R = Recommended notes

CVP-701 Reference Manual 35

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

2 NTR/NTT

NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

NTT (Note Transposition Table)

When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS or ROOT FIXED

[3]/

[4]

NTR (Note

Transposition

Rule)

Determines the relative position of the root note in the chord, when con-

verted from the Source Pattern in response to chord changes. Refer to

the list below.

[5] –

[7]

NTT (Note

Transposition

Table)

Sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Refer to the list

below.

[8]NTT BASS ON/

OFF

The channel for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass

root note, when the on-bass chord is recognized by the instrument.

When NTR is set to GUITAR and this parameter is set to ON, only notes

assigned to bass will be played back by the bass root note.

ROOT TRANS

(Root Transpose)

When the root note is transposed, the interval

between notes is maintained. For example, the

notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3,

A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use

this setting for channels that contain melody

lines.

ROOT FIXED The note is kept as close as possible to the previ-

ous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3

and G3 in the key of C become C3, F3 and A3

when they are transposed to F. Use this setting

for channels that contain chord parts.

GUITAR This is exclusively for transposing guitar accompaniment. Notes are trans-

posed to approximate the chords played with natural guitar fingering.

BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED, the transposition table used does not do

any note conversion. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS, the table used

only converts the notes by maintaining the pitch relationship between notes.

MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as

Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.

CHORD Suitable for chordal parts transposition. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord

2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts.

MELODIC MINOR

When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table

lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes

from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semi-

tone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for melody channels of Sections

which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings.

MELODIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above, augmented and

diminished chords affect the 5th intervals of the Source Pattern.

When playing

a C major

chord.

When playing

an F major

chord.

When playing

a C major

chord.

When playing

an F major

chord.

36 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

When NTR is set to GUITAR

HARMONIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table

lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the

chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted

sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use

this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor

chords, such as Intros and Endings.

HARMONIC MINOR

5th

In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above, augmented and

diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

NATURAL MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table

lowers the third, sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone.

When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third,

flatted sixth and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other

notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which

respond only to a major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings.

NATURAL MINOR

5th

In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above, augmented and dimin-

ished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table

lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the

chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted

seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use

this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a major/minor

chord such as Intros and Endings.

DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above, augmented and diminished

chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.

ALL-PURPOSE This table covers both strummed- and arpeggio-played sound.

STROKE Suitable for strumming sounds of the guitar. Some notes may sound as if

they are muted—this is the normal condition when chords are played on

guitar by strumming.

ARPEGGIO Suitable for arpeggio-played sound of the guitar. Using this table, four

notes arpeggio sounds most beautiful.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 37

Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –

3 HIGH KEY / NOTE LIMIT

4 RTR (Retrigger Rule)

These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to

chord changes.

[4]/

[5]

HIGH KEY This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for

the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest

key are transposed down to the next lowest octave. This setting is

effective only when the NTR parameter (page 35) is set to “Root Trans.”

[6] NOTE LIMIT

LOW

These set the note range (highest and lowest notes) for Voices recorded to

the Style channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that

the Voices sound as realistic as possible — in other words, that no notes

outside the natural range are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low pic-

colo sounds).

[7] NOTE LIMIT

HIGH

STOP The notes stop sounding.

PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the

new chord.

PITCH SHIFT TO

ROOT

The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the

new chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same.

RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the

next chord.

RETRIGGER TO

ROOT

The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord.

However, the octave of the new note remains the same.

C3-E3-G3

F3-A3-C4

♯

2-A

♯

2-C

♯

3-F3-G

♯

Example — When the highest key is F

Root changes

Notes played

E3-G3-C4

F3-A3-C4

♯

F3-G

♯

3-C

♯

Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4

Root changes

Notes played

High Limit

Low Limit

38 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –

Song Playback

– Playing and Practicing Songs –

Contents

Editing Music Notation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat settings, Channel settings, Guide Function) . . .41

• Keyboard Practice Using the Guide Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

• Playing Backing Parts with the Performance Assistant Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

To view the music notation of the selected Song, press the [SCORE] button. You can change the notation

display as desired to suit your personal preferences. The settings here are maintained even when the power is

turned off.

NOTE You can save the setting here as a part of a Song by accessing [FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB[ ][ ] SETUP. See

page 59.

Editing Music Notation Settings

[1] LEFT ON/

OFF

Enables/disables display of the left-hand key range. Depending on other settings,

this parameter may be unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is the case, go

to the detailed setting display (on page 39) and set the LEFT CH. parameter to any

channel except “AUTO.” Or, go to the display [FUNCTION] →

TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING → TAB [ ][ ] GUIDE/

CHANNEL and set the TRACK 2 parameter to any channel except “OFF”

(page 41). RIGHT (next parameter) and LEFT cannot be turned off at the same

time.

[2] RIGHT ON/

OFF

Enables/disables display of the right-hand key range. RIGHT and LEFT (above)

cannot be turned off at the same time.

[3]CHORD

ON/OFF

Enables/disables display of the chords. If the selected Song does not contain chord

data, chords are not displayed.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 39

Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –

Pressing the [8] (SET UP) button calls up the detailed setting display. You can set the

view type by using the [1] – [6] buttons, then press the [8] (OK) button.

[4]LYRICS

ON/OFF

Enables/disables display of the lyrics. If the selected Song does not contain lyric

data, lyrics are not displayed. When the Song contains Pedal events, pressing these

buttons can display the Pedal events, instead of displaying Lyrics.

[5]NOTE ON/

OFF

Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch). The note name is indicated at the left

of the note. When the space between the notes is too small, the indication may be

moved to the top left of the note. When the Song contains Fingering events, pressing

these buttons can display the fingering, instead of displaying note names.

[6] COLOR

NOTE

When this is set to ON, the notes in the display are color-coded (C: red, D: yellow, E:

green, F: orange, G: blue, A: purple, and B: gray).

[7] SIZE Determines the display resolution (or zoom level) of the notation.

[8] SET UP See below.

[1] LEFT CH Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/right-

hand part. This setting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected.

AUTO

The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right- and left-hand parts are

assigned automatically — setting the parts to the same channel as the channel

which is specified in [FUNCTION] → TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 → [H] SONG

SETTING → TAB [ ][ ] GUIDE/CHANNEL (page 41).

1 – 16

Assigns the specified MIDI channel (1 – 16) to the respective left- or right-hand

parts.

OFF (LEFT CH only)

No channel assignment. This disables display of the left-hand key range.

[2]RIGHT CH

[3]/

[4]

KEY

SIGNATURE

This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a Song, at the stopped

position. This setting is useful for Songs you've recorded with key changes, so

the key signature changes are properly reflected in the notation.

[5] QUANTIZE This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift

or correct the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular

note value. Make sure to select the smallest note value used in the Song.

40 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –

When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, channels 9-16 in the Song data are replaced with

Style channels – allowing you to play the accompaniment parts of the Song yourself. Try playing chords

along with the Song playback as shown in the instructions below. When playing back a Song and a Style at

the same time, we recommend that you use the Preset Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder.

1 Select a Song.

2 Select a Style.

3 Press the STYLE [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the

Auto Accompaniment function.

4 Press the STYLE [SYNC START] button to enable standby

— letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment

as soon as you start playing.

5 While holding down the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button,

press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to enable synchronized

start for the Song.

6 Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button or play chords with your left hand.

The Song and Style starts playing. When you play chords, pressing the [SCORE] button and turning

CHORD on (page 38) allows you to see the chord information.

NOTE When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, the tempo value set in the Song is automatically used.

When Song playback is stopped, the Style playback is also stopped at the same time.

[6] NOTE NAME Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation

from among the following three types. The settings here are available when the

NOTE ON/OFF parameter above is set to ON.

A, B, C

Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B).

Fixed DO

Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected

language.

Movable DO

Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as

such are relative to the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the

key of G major the root note of “Sol” would be indicated as “Do.” As with

“Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language.

Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback

CVP-701 Reference Manual 41

Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –

The instrument has a variety of Song playback functions — Repeat playback, various Guide settings, etc. —

which can be accessed in the display below.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING

2 Select the desired page, GUIDE/CHANNEL or OTHERS, by using the TAB [ ][ ]

buttons.

Detailed settings for playback, such as Repeat mode, can be set in the OTHERS page of the Song Setting

display.

 GUIDE/CHANNEL Page

Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat settings, Channel

settings, Guide Function)

[A]/[B] GUIDE MODE See page 43.

[C] GUIDE LAMP

[D] GUIDE LAMP

TIMING

[I] PHRASE

MARK REPEAT

Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed part of some Song data, which

specifies a certain location (set of measures) in the Song. When this is on,

the section corresponding to the specified Phrase Mark number is

repeatedly played back.

[2]/

[3]

TRACK 2

These parameters determine which MIDI channel in the Song data is assigned

to the Left- or Right-hand part of the Guide function and the Song Score

function.

[4]/

[5]

TRACK 1

[6]/

[7]

AUTO CH SET When set to “ON,” this automatically sets the proper MIDI channels for

the Right- and Left hand parts pre-programmed in the commercially

available Song data. Normally, this should be set to “ON.”

42 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –

 OTHERS Page

[G] REPEAT MODE Determines the method of repeat playback.

OFF

Plays through the selected Song, then stops.

SINGLE

Plays through the selected Song repeatedly.

ALL

Continues playback through all the Songs in the specified folder

repeatedly.

RANDOM

Continues playback at random through all the Songs in the specified

folder repeatedly.

NOTE The preset Songs in the “Follow Lights” folder contain the Guide settings. These Songs are inap-

propriate for use with ALL or RANDOM repeat.

[H] CHORD

DETECTION

PRIORITY

Determines the priority of the chords for accompaniment, either the ones

contained in the MIDI Song being played back or the chords you play in

the chord section of the keyboard.

• MIDI SONG: Gives priority to the chords contained in the MIDI Song.

• KEYBOARD: Gives priority to the chords you play in the chord

section of the keyboard. Set this if you want to practice playing chords

with MIDI Song playback. Once you play in the chord section during

MIDI Song playback, the instrument ignores the chords contained in

the MIDI Song until the playback ends.

[I] FAST

FORWARD

TYPE

Determines the fast forward type of when pressing [FF] button during

MIDI Song playback.

• Jump: Pressing [FF] button once instantly sets the playback position to

the next measure without sounding. Holding [FF] button scrolls

forward continuously.

• Scrub: Pressing and holding [FF] button plays and sounds the MIDI

Song at high speed.

In the following cases, fast forwarding through a MIDI Song functions as

the Jump type even if Scrub is selected.

• When MIDI Clock is set to External

• When the MIDI Song is fast-forwarded by Phrase marks

NOTE Pressing [FF] button during while a MIDI Song is stopped functions as the Jump type.

[2]/

[3]

LYRICS

LANGUAGE

Determines the language of the displayed lyrics.

AUTO

When the language is specified in the Song data, the lyrics are displayed

accordingly. When the language is not specified in the Song data, the

lyrics language is regarded as INTERNATIONAL below.

INTERNATIONAL

Handles the displayed lyrics as a western language.

JAPANESE

Handles the displayed lyrics as Japanese.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 43

Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –

Keyboard Practice Using the Guide Function

The keyboard guide lamps indicate the notes (location and timing) for you to play.

1 Select the desired Song for practicing the keyboard or singing.

2 Call up the setting display.

[FUNCTION] → TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING → TAB [ ][ ] GUIDE/CHANNEL

3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type.

Guide menu for keyboard practice

• Follow Lights

With this function, the keyboard guide lamps indicate which notes you should play. Song playback

pauses and waits for you to play. When you play the correct notes, Song playback continues.

•Any Key

With this function, you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key (any key is OK) in

time with the rhythm. Song playback pauses and waits for you to play any key. Simply play a key on the

keyboard in time with the music and Song playback continues.

•Your Tempo

The same as Follow Lights, except that Song playback matches the speed at which you play.

Guide menu for singing

•Karao-Key

This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one finger, while you sing along. This

is useful for singing to your own performance. Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. Simply

play a key on the keyboard (any key is fine) and Song playback continues.

[4]/

[5]

QUICK START On some commercially available Song data, certain settings related to the

Song (such as Voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the first

measure, before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the

instrument reads all initial non-note data of the Song at the highest

possible speed, then automatically switches to the appropriate tempo at

the first note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible,

with a minimum pause for reading of data.

[6]/

[7]

P.A .T. Se e page 45.

44 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –

4 Turn the [GUIDE] button on.

5 Call up the Score display by pressing the [SCORE] button.

6 Press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

Practice playing the keyboard or singing, along with the Guide type selected in step 3.

NOTE The guide lamps light according to Song channels recorded to Track 1 and 2 and the chord data in the Song (when such data is included). If the guide

lamps do not light as intended, you may need to assign the appropriate right- and left-hand channels to Track 1 and 2 respectively (page 41).

7 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop playback.

NOTE If you want to turn the guide lamps off, press the [C] (GUIDE LAMP) button in the SONG SETTING display (in step 3 as described above).

NOTE You can save the Guide settings as a part of the Song data (page 59). For Songs to which the Guide settings have been saved, the Guide function will be

automatically turned on and the related settings will be recalled when the Song is selected.

Determining the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light (GUIDE LAMP TIMING)

Press the [D] button in the SONG SETTING display in step 3 to select the timing by which the keyboard

guide lamps light.

•JUST

The guide lamps light in time with the music, at the same timing you should play.

•NEXT

The guide lamps light slightly ahead of the music, indicating the notes you should play next. The guide

lamps flash if you fail to play the keys with the correct timing.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 45

Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –

Playing Backing Parts with the Performance Assistant Technology

This feature lets you play your own backing parts on the keyboard along with Song playback, and have them

sound perfectly appropriate (even though you might be playing wrong notes).

1 Select a Song containing chord data.

The Performance Assistant Technology applies only to Songs containing chord data. To confirm whether

the selected Song contains chord data or not, return to the Main display, then start playback. If the current

Song contains chord data, the Main display shows the current chord type. After stopping playback, go to

the next step.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING → TAB [ ][ ] OTHERS

3 Press the [6]/[7] button to turn the P.A.T. (Performance Assistant Technology)

on.

4 Press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

5 Play the keyboard.

Along with Song playback, try playing a bass line in the left hand area while playing various phrases or

chords in the right hand area. Even if you do not know what notes should be played, don’t worry and play

any keys as desired! Only the harmonically “correct” notes matching the current chord are sounded,

regardless of the notes you actually play.

6 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop playback.

7 Press the [6]/[7] button to turn the P.A.T. off.

NOTE Selecting another Song may reset P.A.T. to OFF.

Current chord

46 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

Song Recording via MIDI

– Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

Contents

Recording Style Playback First, Then Melodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

• Recording a Style Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

• Recording a Melody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

• Saving the Recorded Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

• Recording Melodies (Step Recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

• Recording Chords (Step Recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

• Re-recording a Specific Section — Punch In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

• Changing the Setup Parameters Recorded to the Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

• Editing Channel Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

• Editing Chord Events, Notes, System Exclusive Events and Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Here, you will learn how to record a style to channels 9 – 16 first and then a melody to channel 1 in a realtime

recording. The instructions hereafter assume the following panel settings as an example. Before starting

recording, make the panel settings as follows;

• Turn the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT1] button on, and then select the desired voice of the RIGHT1 part.

• Turn the [LEFT] and [RIGHT2] parts off.

• Select the desired Style.

• Set the Fingering Type to “MULTI FINGER” (default setting):

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB [ ][ ]

CHORD FINGERING

Recording a Style Performance

1 Press the SONG CONTROL [REC] and SONG CONTROL [STOP] buttons

simultaneously.

A blank Song for recording is automatically set.

Recording Style Playback First, Then Melodies

CVP-701 Reference Manual 47

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

2 Specify the target channel and part for recording.

2-1 While holding down the SONG CONTROL [REC] button, press the [1] – [8] buttons to

specify the desired channels (9 – 16) for recording.

As the default setting, Style parts (Rythm1-Phrase 2) are assigned to channels 9 – 16 as illustrated

on page 49. You can change the parts to be recorded by performing step 2-2.

2-2 Select the desired part which will be recorded to the channel specified in step 2-1 by using

the [C]/[D] buttons.

NOTE To cancel the recording, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button.

3 Press the STYLE [SYNC START] button, then play the style by specifying the chords in

the chord section.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play the Style. You can also start recording by pressing

SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Perform as desired, playing the Style by changing chords and/

or sections.

NOTE Make sure that the STYLE [ACMP ON/OFF] button is turned on.

4 After you finish your performance, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop

recording.

5 To hear the recorded performance, press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

This finishes recording of the Style. Now, let’s record a melody to channel 1.

2-1

2-2

Chord section

Split Point (F 2 as default)

♯

48 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

Recording a Melody

6 Specify the target channel and part for recording.

6-1 While holding down the SONG CONTROL [REC] button, press the [1] button to specify

channel 1 for recording.

6-2 Select “RIGHT1” by using the [C]/[D] buttons.

NOTICE

Previously recorded data will be overwritten if you set channels which have recorded data to “REC.”

NOTE To cancel the recording, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button.

7 Play a melody.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard, or when you press the SONG

CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. You can play a melody while listening to the already recorded Style

performance.

When recording another channel, you can turn already recorded channels on or off in the display.

8 After you finish your performance, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop

recording.

9 To hear the recorded performance, press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

This finishes recording of the Style and the melody. Now, let’s save the recorded performance as a file (below).

Saving the Recorded Performance

Save the recorded performance as a file. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up

the Song Selection display. The recorded performance will be saved as a file in the

Song Selection display. For the following instructions, see “Saving Files” in the

Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

The recorded Song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 49

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

The Owner’s Manual covers how to create an original Song by recording your keyboard performance (called

“Realtime Recording”). This Reference Manual shows how to create an original Song by entering notes one

by one (called “Step Recording”) and how to improve an already created Song by editing the detailed

parameters.

 Realtime Recording and Step Recording

When creating a Song, these two Recording methods are available. With Realtime Recording, this instrument

records the performance data as it is played. With Step Recording, you can compose your performance by

“writing” it down one event at a time. This chapter primarily covers the instructions for Step Recording.

 MIDI Song Data Structure

A MIDI Song consists of 16 MIDI channels. You can create data of a MIDI Song by recording your

performance to a specific channel or channels in realtime, or by executing Step Recording.

Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator)

Song

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Channel 9

Channel 10

Channel 11

Channel 12

Channel 13

Channel 14

Channel 15

Channel 16

System Exclusive

Lyrics

Recording Part

(Default settings)

Right 1

Left

Right 2

—

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Keyboard Performance

• Realtime Recording:

By default, your keyboard performance will be

recorded to MIDI channels 1 – 3. You can also

record additional performances to channels 4 – 8.

• Step Recording:

Without specifying the keyboard part, you can input

melodies or notes one by one to the desired channel.

Style Playback

• Realtime Recording:

By default, Style playback will be recorded to MIDI

channels 9 – 16.

• Step Recording:

After inputting the Chord change/Section change

events, touch [Expand] to actually record the note

data to MIDI channels 9 – 16.

50 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

 Song Creator Display Structure

The Song Creator can be called up via [FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR.

There are several Pages (tabs) in the Song Creator display.

•REC MODE For re-recording the Song. See page 57.

•SETUP For selecting the panel setups to be recorded to the top position of the Song. See page 59.

• CHANNEL

For editing the Channel events. See page 60.

• CHORD For recording the Chords and Sections with timing (page 54) or editing them (page 64).

•1-16 For recording the melodies (Step Recording; see below) or editing them (page 64).

•SYS/EX. For editing the System Exclusive events (tempo, time signature, etc.). See page 64.

•LYRICS For inputting/editing the Song name and lyrics. See page 65.

Recording Melodies (Step Recording)

1 Press the SONG CONTROL [REC] and SONG CONTROL [STOP] buttons

simultaneously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording.

NOTE Selecting a blank Song initializes the panel settings.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB [ ][ ] 1-16

3 Press the [F] button to select the channel for recording.

4 Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 51

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

5 Start Step Recording by using the [A] – [J] buttons and [1] – [8] buttons, as

well as the keyboard.

Refer to the example on page 52 for specific instructions.

[A]/[B]/[C] Moves the cursor in the list.

[G] Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered. The velocity

value can be specified within a range from 1 to 127. The higher the velocity

value, the louder the sound becomes.

Kbd.Vel: Actual resulting velocity

fff: 127

ff: 111

f: 95

mf: 79

mp: 63

p: 47

pp: 31

ppp:15

[H] Determines the gate time (note length) of the note to be entered.

Normal: 80%

Tenuto: 99%

Staccato: 40%

Staccatissimo: 20%

Manual: The gate time can be set to any desired percentage by using the

[DATA ENTRY] dial.

[I] Determines the note type to be entered: normal, dotted or triplet.

[J] DELETE Deletes the selected data.

[1] BAR Sets the position of the note to be entered.

[2]BEAT

[3]CLK

[4] –

[8]

Determines the note length to be entered: whole-note, half-note, quarter-note,

eighth-note or sixteenth-note.

When a note is input, the location

(bar: beat: clock), note name,

velocity and length are shown as a

list.

52 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

Example of Step Recording — Melodies

In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while

executing the operation.

Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Recording display.

NOTE Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated from the recorded MIDI data, it may not appear exactly the same as shown here.

NOTE The illustration given here is just a sample for entering. Non-note musical performance symbols will not be shown in the Score display, even if you've

entered them.

1 Enter the first and second notes with a slur.

1-1 Press the [G] button to select “f.”

1-2 Press the [H] button to select “Ten.” (Tenuto).

1-3 Press the [I] button to select the dotted note type.

1-4 Select the dotted quarter-note by using the [6] buttons.

1-5 Play the C3 key.

The first note is entered.

1-6 Press the [I] button to select the “normal” note type.

1-7 Press the [7] button to select the eighth-note length.

1-8 Play the D3 key.

The second note is entered.

2 Enter the next notes and apply staccato.

2-1 Press the [H] button to select “Sta.” (Staccato).

There are two Staccato settings; choose the “40%” setting.

2-2 Press the [6] button to select the quarter-note length.

2-3 Play the keys E3 and F3 in order.

The first measure has been completed.

3 To enter a quarter-note rest, press the [6] button again.

To enter the rest, use the [4] – [8] buttons. (Press the button once to select the rest value, and

once again to actually enter it.) A rest having the specified note length will be entered.

1234

* The numbers shown in the illustration

correspond to the following operation

step numbers.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 53

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

4 Enter the next notes and apply a tie.

4-1 Press the [G] button to select “mP.”

4-2 Press the [H] button to select “Nrm.” (Normal).

4-3 While holding G3 key on the keyboard, press the [6] button.

Do not release the G3 key yet. Keep holding it while executing the following steps.

4-4 While holding the G3 key, press the C4 key.

Do not release the G3 and C4 keys yet. Keep holding the notes while executing the following step.

4-5 While holding the keys G3 and C4, press the [5] button.

After pressing the button, release the keys.

5 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top

of the Song, then hear the newly entered Song by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

6 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Recording display.

7 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.

For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save opera-

tion.

54 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

Recording Chords (Step Recording)

You can record Chords and Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, and so on) one at a time with precise timing.

These instructions show how to record chord changes using the Step Record function.

1 Press the SONG CONTROL [REC] and SONG CONTROL [STOP] buttons

simultaneously.

A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording.

NOTE Selecting a blank Song initializes the panel settings.

2 Select the Style you want to use in the Song.

3 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB [ ][ ] CHORD

4 Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display.

5 Now, go on to the next section and start Step Recording.

For information on these

buttons, refer to page 51.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 55

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

Example of Step Recording — Chords

Before starting, make sure the [AUTO FILL IN] button is set to off since no Fill in is included in the

notation example above.

1 Enter the chords for the Main A section.

1-1 Press the STYLE [MAIN A] button.

1-2 Press the [5] button to select the half-note length.

1-3 Play the chord C, F and G in the chord section of the keyboard.

2 Enter the chords for the Break section.

2-1 Press the STYLE [BREAK] button.

2-2 Press the [6] button to select the quarter-note length.

2-3 Play the chords F and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard.

NOTE To enter fill-ins, turn the [AUTO FILL IN] button to ON, and simply press the desired MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] button.

C F G F G7 C

1 2 3

* The numbers shown in the illustration

correspond to the respective operation

step numbers below.

MAIN A BREAK MAIN B

NOTE This example uses a Style in 4/4 time.

1-2

1-3

1-1

2-3

2-1

2-2

56 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

3 Enter the chords for the Main B section.

3-1 Press the STYLE [MAIN B] button.

3-2 Press the [4] button to select the whole-note length.

3-3 Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard.

4 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top

of the Song, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered Song.

5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Recording display.

6 Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the input chord change data into the Song

data.

7 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.

For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save opera-

tion.

3-33-1

3-2

CVP-701 Reference Manual 57

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

Re-recording a Specific Section — Punch In/Out

When re-recording a specific section of an already-recorded Song, use the Punch IN/OUT function. In this

method, only the data between the Punch In point and the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly

recorded data. Keep in mind that the notes before and after the Punch In/Out points are not recorded over,

although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in and out of the Punch In/Out timing.

1 Select the Song you want to re-record.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TA B [ ][ ] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB [ ][ ] REC MODE

3 Determine the settings for recording.

[1] –

[3]

REC START

(Punch In)

Determines the recording start behavior.

NORMAL

Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG CONTROL

[PLAY/PAUSE] button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro

Standby mode.

FIRST KEY ON

The Song plays back normally, then starts overwrite recording as soon

as you play the keyboard.

PUNCH IN AT

The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indicated

Punch In measure, then starts overwrite recording at that point. You can

set the Punch In measure by pressing the [3] button.

[4] –

[6]

REC END

(Punch Out)

Determines the recording stop behavior, or how data is handled after

recording is stopped.

REPLACE ALL

This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped.

PUNCH OUT

The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as the

Punch Out point. This setting maintains all data after the point at which

recording is stopped.

PUNCH OUT AT

Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the speci-

fied Punch Out measure (set with the corresponding display button), at

which point recording stops and normal playback continues. This setting

maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. You can

set the Punch Out measure by pressing the [6] buttons.

58 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

4 While holding the SONG CONTROL [REC] button, press the desired track button.

5 Press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start Punch In/Out recording.

Play the keyboard at the Punch In point and stop recording at the Punch Out point.

6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.

For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save opera-

tion.

 Examples of re-recording with various Punch In/Out settings

This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In/Out function. The illustrations below

indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.

[7]/

[8]

PEDAL PUNCH

IN/OUT

When this is set to ON, you can use the center pedal to control the

Punch In and Punch Out points. While a Song is playing back, pressing

(and holding) the center pedal instantly enables Punch In recording,

while releasing the pedal stops recording (Punch Out). You can press

and release the center pedal as often as you want during playback to

punch in/out of overwrite recording. Note that the current function

assignment of the center pedal is cancelled when the Pedal Punch In/Out

function is set to ON.

NOTE Pedal Punch In/Out operation may be reversed depending on the particular pedal you’ve con-

nected to the instrument. If necessary, change the pedal polarity to reverse the control (page 89).

12345678

12345

12345678

12345

12345678

12345

12345678

6 8

12345 7

REC START setting

REC END setting

NORMAL

REPLACE ALL

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT AT 006

FIRST KEY ON

REPLACE ALL

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT AT 006

PUNCH IN AT 003

REPLACE ALL

PUNCH IN AT 003

PUNCH OUT

PUNCH IN AT 003

PUNCH OUT AT 006

Original data

Start overwrite

recording *1

Start overwrite

recording *1

Start overwrite

recording *1

Play back

original data

Play back

original data

Play back

original data

Play back

original data

Play back

original data

Play back

original data

Play the keyboard to start

overwrite recording

Play the keyboard to start

overwrite recording

Play the keyboard to start

overwrite recording

Start overwrite recording

Stop recording *2

Stop overwrite recording/

play original data

Stop recording *2

Stop overwrite recording/

play original data

Stop recording *2

Stop overwrite recording/

play original data

Deleted

*1 To avoid overwriting measures 1 –

2, start recording from measure 3.

*2 To stop recording, press the [REC]

button at the end of measure 5.

Previously recorded data

Newly recorded data

Deleted data

Deleted

CVP-701 Reference Manual 59

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

Changing the Setup Parameters Recorded to the Song

The current settings of the Mixing Console display and other panel settings can be recorded to the top

position of the Song as the Setup data. The Mixing Console and panel settings recorded here are

automatically recalled when the Song starts.

1 Select the Song to which you want to record the Setup data.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TA B [ ][ ]MENU 2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB[ ][ ] SETUP

3 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to move the Song position to the top of the

Song.

4 Determine the Setup data to be recorded.

[1] –

[4]

SELECT Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically

called up along with the selected Song. The items selected here can be

recorded only to the top position of the Song, except for the

KEYBOARD VOICE.

VOICE, VOLUME, PAN, FILTER, EFFECT, TEMPO, EQ

Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing

Console.

KEYBOARD VOICE

Records the panel settings, including the Voice selection of the keyboard

parts (RIGHT 1, 2, and LEFT) and their on/off status. Panel settings

recorded here are same as the ones memorized to the One Touch Setting.

This can be recorded at any point in a Song.

SCORE SETTING

Records the settings in the Score display.

GUIDE SETTING

Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide ON/

OFF setting.

LYRICS SETTING

Records the settings in the Lyrics display.

MIC SETTING

Records the microphone settings in the MIC SETTING display.

[5]/

[6]

MARK ON/OFF For adding or removing checkmarks to/from the selected item. Checked

items are recorded to the Song.

[7]/

[8]

APPLY For recording the checked item to the top position of the Song.

60 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

5 Press one of the [7]/[8] (APPLY) buttons to record the data.

6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.

For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

The edited Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without carrying out the Save

operation.

Editing Channel Events

You can apply various useful functions to already recorded data, such as Quantize and Transpose, on the

CHANNEL page.

1 Select a Song to be edited.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB [ ][ ] CHANNEL

3 In the CHANNEL Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu, then edit the

data by using the [1] – [8] buttons.

For details of the edit menu and available settings, see page 61.

4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation for the current display.

After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if

you are not satisfied with the operation results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous

operation can be undone.

5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.

For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTICE

The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save opera-

tion.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 61

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

1 QUANTIZE

The Quantize function allows you to align the timing of all the notes in a channel. For example, if you

record the musical phrase shown below, you may not play it with absolute precision, and your

performance may have been slightly ahead of or behind the precise timing. Quantize is a convenient way

to correct for this.

2 DELETE

You can delete the data of the specified channel in the Song. Select the channel whose data is to be deleted

by using the [1] – [8] buttons, then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation.

[2]/

[3]

CHANNEL Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is to be quantized.

[4] –

[6]

SIZE Selects the quantize size (resolution). For optimum results, you should

set the Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel. For exam-

ple, if eighth notes are the shortest in the channel, you should use 1/8

note as the Quantize size.

The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally

convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at

the same time. For example, when the straight eighth notes and eighth

notes triplet are contained in the same channel, if you quantize by the

straight eighth notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to straight

eighth notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel. However, if you

use the eighth note + eighth note triplet setting, both the straight and

triplet notes will be quantized correctly.

[7]/

[8]

STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100%

produces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will

be moved toward the specified quantization beats according to the spec-

ified percentage. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you pre-

serve some of the “human” feel in the recording.

After 1/8 note quantization

1/4 note

triplet

1/16 note

triplet

1/32 note

1/8 note+

1/8 note triplet*

1/16 note+

1/8 note triplet*

1/16 note+

1/16 note triplet*

1/8 note

triplet

Settings:

Original data

(assuming 4/4 meter)

Quantizing

strength = 100

Quantizing

strength = 50

Quarter-note length

62 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

3 MIX

This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets

you copy the data from one channel to another.

4 CHANNEL TRANSPOSE

This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two

octaves in semitone increments.

NOTE Make sure not to transpose channels 9 and 10. In general, Drum kits are assigned to these channels. If you transpose the channels of Drum kits, the

instruments assigned to each key will be changed.

[2]/

[3]

SOURCE 1 Determines the MIDI channel (1 – 16) to be mixed. All MIDI events of

the channel specified here are copied to the destination channel.

[4]/

[5]

SOURCE 2 Determines the MIDI channel (1 – 16) to be mixed. Only note events of

the channel specified here are copied to the destination channel. Besides

the values 1 – 16, there is a “COPY” setting that allows you to copy the

data from Source 1 to the destination channel.

[6]/

[7]

DESTINATION Determines the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed.

[F]

CH 1–8/CH 9–16

Toggles between the two channel displays: Channels 1–8, and Channels 9–16.

[G] ALL CH To simultaneously set all channels to the same value, adjust the Channel

Transpose for one of the channels while holding down this button.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 63

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

Editing Chord Events, Notes, System Exclusive Events and Lyrics

You can edit chord events, note events, System Exclusive events and lyrics in the same manner on the

corresponding display: CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. and LYRICS. These displays are called “Event List display”

because some events are shown in a list view.

NOTE After you edit events in the CHORD tab display, press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the data into Song data.

NOTE Chord section data recorded with Realtime Recording cannot be indicated and edited on the Event List displays.

[A]/[B] Moves the cursor up/down and select the desired event.

[C] Moves the cursor to the top (beginning of the Song).

[D]/[E] Moves the cursor left/right and select the desired parameter of the high-

lighted event.

[H] FILTER Calls up the Filter display (page 65), letting you select only the events

you wish to be shown in the event list.

[I] SAVE Press to save the edited Song.

[J] MULTI SEL. Holding this button while using the [A]/[B] buttons lets you select multi-

ple events.

[1] BAR Determines the position (bar/beat/clock) of the data. One clock is equal to

1/1920th of a quarter note.

[2]BEAT

[3]CLK

[4]/

[5]

DATA ENTRY Adjusts the event value. For coarse adjustment, use the [4] buttons.

For fine adjustment, use the [5] buttons or [DATA ENTRY] dial.

[6] CUT Executes the cut/copy/delete/paste operation.

[7]COPY

[7] DELETE

[8]PASTE

[6] INS (INSERT) Adds a new event.

[8] CANCEL Cancels editing and restores the original value.

Indicates the event

value.

Indicates the location

(position) of the

corresponding event.

Indicates the event type.

See page 64.

Event List display

64 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

 Chord Events (CHORD Page)

 Note Events (1-16 Page)

 System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX. Page)

Style Style

Tempo Tempo

Chord Chord root, Chord type, On Bass Chord

Sect Style Section (Intro, Main, Fill In, Break, Ending)

OnOff On/off status for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style

CH.Vol Volume for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style

S.Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style

Note An individual note within a Song. Includes the note number which corresponds

to the key which was played, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is

played, and the gate time value (the length of a note).

Ctrl (Control Change) Settings to control the Voice, such as volume, pan, filter and effect depth

(edited via the Mixing Console described in chapter 9), etc.

Prog (Program Change) MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice.

P.Bnd (Pitch Bend) Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously.

A.T. (Aftertouch)

This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played.

Note that the keyboard of this instrument does not feature Aftertouch.

ScBar (Score Start Bar) Determines the top measure of a Song.

Tempo Determines the tempo value.

Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature.

Key (Key signature) Determines the key signature, as well as the major/minor setting, for the music

score shown on the display.

XGPrm (XG

parameters)

Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parameters. Refer to

the “MIDI Data Format” in the MIDI Reference downloadable from the

Yamaha Manual Library.

SYS/EX. (System

Exclusive)

Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot

create new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can

delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot cre-

ate new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete,

cut, copy, and paste the data.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 65

Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –

 Lyrics Events (LYRICS Page)

Name Allows you to enter the Song name.

Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics.

Code CR: Enters a line break in the lyrics text.

LF: Clears the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics.

Displaying Specific Types of Events

In the Event List displays, various types of events are shown. It may sometimes be difficult to pinpoint

the ones you want to edit. This is where the Filter function comes in handy. It lets you determine which

event types will be shown in the Event List displays.

1 Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. or LYRICS displays.

2 Checkmark the desired item to be displayed.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to execute the settings.

[C] MAIN Displays all main types of events.

[D] CTRL. CHG Displays all specific Control Change message events.

[E] STYLE Displays all types of Style playback related events.

[H] ALL ON Checkmarks all event types.

[I]

NOTE/ALL OFF/

CHORD

“NOTE” or “CHORD” selects only NOTE/CHORD data.

“ALL OFF” removes all checkmarks.

[J] INVERT Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other

words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previ-

ously unchecked and vice versa.

[2] –

[5]

Selects an event type to be checked or unchecked.

[6]/

[7]

MARK ON Enters/removes the checkmark for the selected event type.

The checked event types can be shown on the CHORD, 1-

16, SYS/EX. or LYRICS Page.

[6]/

[7]

MARK OFF

66 CVP-701 Reference Manual

USB Audio Player/Recorder

– Playback and Recording Audio Files –

This function is fully explained in the Owner’s Manual. Refer to the corresponding chapter in the Owner’s Manual.

Microphone

– Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance –

Contents

Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

• Saving the Microphone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

• VOCAL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

• TALK Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

This section lets you set parameters for various Effects that are applied to the microphone sound. You should

make both “Vocal” and “Talk” settings — “Vocal,” for your singing performance, and “Talk,” for making

announcements between songs, for example.

1 Connect the microphone to the instrument, then call up the MIC SETTING display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 → [F] MIC SETTING

2 Press the [F] button to turn the MIC on.

This lets you talk into the microphone and hear the changes made while setting the parameters.

3 Select the desired page, VOCAL or TALK, by using the TAB [ ][ ] buttons.

MIC ON/OFF

Turns the microphone sound on or off.

TALK ON/OFF

Switches the microphone setup between the Vocal setup (for singing and normal performance) and Talk

setup (for making announcements or talking between songs). When set to ON, only the Talk settings are

active. When set to OFF, only the Vocal settings are active.

Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk)

VOCAL

page

TAL K

page

Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance –

CVP-701 Reference Manual 67

Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance –

4 Use the [A] – [E] buttons to select the specific row (or group) of parameters to be

adjusted.

5 Set the value of specific parameters in the row by using the [1] – [6] buttons.

For information on each parameter, see page 67 – 68.

NOTICE

After setting, go to the Mic Setting Memory display by pressing the [H] (USER MEMORY) button and save the settings (see below

section). The settings will be lost if you exit from this display or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save

operation.

Saving the Microphone Settings

All the settings (VOCAL/TALK pages) are saved together as a single file. Up to ten files can be saved. For

ease in future recall, you should assign a sufficiently descriptive name to the file or one that matches your

performance.

1 On the MIC SETTING display (in step 3 above), press the [H] (USER MEMORY) button.

2 Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the file to USER.

For details on the naming and deleting procedures, refer to the “Renaming a File/Folder” and “Deleting

Files/Folders” sections in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTE The microphone setting file can be saved only to the internal USER drive. If you want to save this setting to the USB flash drive, save the User Effect file

on the display called up via [FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 → [G] SYSTEM → TAB [ ][ ] SETUP FILES → [H] (USER EFFECT FILES) →

TAB [ ][ ] USB → [6] (SAVE).

VOCAL Page

3-BAND EQ (selected by [A]/[B] buttons)

EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands which can be

boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. This instrument features a high-grade

three-band (LOW, MID and HIGH) digital equalizer function for the microphone sound.

To get the most convenient use of this Talk function, use the [1] button to assign one of the pedals

(Left, Center, or AUX) to “TALK” in the following display: [DIRECT ACCESS] → press one of the

pedals (Left, Center, or AUX)

This allows you to use one of the pedals to switch the Talk function on and off during your performance,

without having to call up the menu above.

Calling Up the Microphone Settings Saved to USER

1 Call up the Mic Setting Memory display by pressing the [H] (USER MEMORY) button on the

MIC SETTING display.

2 Use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired setting file.

[1]/

[3]/

[5]

Hz Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band.

[2]/

[4]/

[6]

dB Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB.

68 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance –

NOISE GATE (selected by [C]/[D] buttons)

This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level. This

effectively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass.

COMPRESSOR (selected by [C]/[D] buttons)

This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level.

This is especially useful for smoothing out vocals that have widely varying dynamics. It effectively

“compresses” the signal, making soft parts louder and loud parts softer. For a maximum compression

effect, set RATIO to a high setting and adjust the OUT parameter for optimum volume.

TALK Page

The settings here are for your speech or announcements (NOT your singing performance), and are active when

the TALK (page 66) is set to ON. All indications and parameters (with the exception of TALK MIXING

below) are the same as in the VOCAL page. However, the settings are independent from those in the VOCAL

page.

TALK MIXING (selected by [E] button)

[1] SW (Switch) Turns the Noise Gate on or off.

[2] TH. (Threshold) Adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open.

[3] SW (Switch) Turns the Compressor on or off.

[4] TH. (Threshold) Adjusts the input level above which the Compressor is applied.

[5] RATIO Adjusts the compression ratio. Higher ratios result in a more compressed

sound, with a reduced dynamic range.

[6] OUT Adjusts the final output level.

[1] VOLUME Determines the output volume of the microphone sound.

[2] PAN Determines the stereo pan position of the microphone sound.

[3] REVERB

DEPTH

Determines the depth of the reverb effects applied to the microphone

sound.

[4] CHORUS

DEPTH

Determines the depth of the chorus effects applied to the microphone

sound.

[5]/

[6]

REDUCTION

LEVEL

Determines the amount of reduction to be applied to the overall sound

(excepting the microphone input) — allowing you to effectively adjust

the balance between your voice and the overall instrument sound.

Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song –

CVP-701 Reference Manual 69

Music Finder

– Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song –

Contents

Registering a Song, Audio or Style File (SONG/AUDIO/STYLE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

• Recalling the Registered Data from Music Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Creating a Set of Favorite Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Editing Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Saving the Record as a Single File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

• Calling Up Music Finder Records Saved to USER or USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

By registering a Song, Audio or Style file in various locations (Preset, User and USB) into Music Finder, you

can conveniently and easily call up the file from the Song title.

NOTE If you want to register files in the USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive containing the data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

1 On the corresponding File Selection display, select a Song, Audio or Style File to be

registered to the Music Finder.

2 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as

necessary.

3 Press the [5] (ADD TO MF) button to register the selected file to Music Finder.

The display automatically changes to the Music Finder Record Edit display.

4 Press [8] (OK) button to start the registration.

Press the [8] (CANCEL) button to cancel the registration.

Registering a Song, Audio or Style File (SONG/AUDIO/STYLE)

70 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song –

5 Confirm that the registered file name is shown in the MUSIC column while (SONG),

(AUDIO) or the Style name is shown in the STYLE column.

Recalling the Registered Data from Music Finder

You can recall the registered Song, Audio or Style data in the same way as done in the “Selecting Desired

Panel Settings from the Records” and “Searching for the Panel Settings” in the Owner’s Manual, chapter 8.

NOTE If you want to play back files in the USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive containing the data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal beforehand.

To play back the registered files

• To play back a recalled Song file, press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button after selecting the

SONG record.

• To play back a recalled Audio file, press the [J] (AUDIO) button in the MUSIC FINDER display after

selecting the AUDIO record.

• To play back a recalled Style file, select the Style record then follow the same procedure as in Style

playback described in the Owner’s Manual, chapter 3.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 71

Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song –

As convenient as the Search function is in exploring the depths of the Music Finder records, you may want to

create a custom “folder” of your favorite records — so you can quickly call up the panel settings and song

data you use frequently.

1 Call up the MUSIC FINDER display by pressing the [MUSIC FINDER] button and select

the desired record.

2 Press the [H] (ADD TO FAVORITE) button to add the selected record to the FAVORITE

display, then press the [G] (YES) button to actually add the record.

3 Call up the FAVORITE display by using the TAB [ ][ ] buttons, and check to see if

the record has been added.

Creating a Set of Favorite Records

Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Display

1 Select the record you want to delete from the FAVORITE display.

2 Press the [H] (DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button, then press the [G] (YES) button to actually

delete the record.

72 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song –

You can create a new record by editing the currently selected record. The newly created records are automati-

cally saved in the internal memory.

1 Call up the MUSIC FINDER display by pressing the [MUSIC FINDER] button and select

the desired record to be edited.

2 Press the [8] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the EDIT display.

3 Edit the record as desired.

Editing Records

[A] MUSIC Edits the song name. Pressing the [A] button calls up the pop-up window

for entering the song name.

[B] KEYWORD

Edits the keyword. Pressing the [B] button calls up the pop-up window to enter

the keyword.

[C] STYLE/SONG/

AUDIO

Changes the Style in case of STYLE record (panel settings). Pressing the

[C] button calls up the Style Selection display. After selecting the desired

Style, press the [EXIT] button to return back to the Edit display.

For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be edited.

[D] BEAT Changes the beat (time signature) of the record for search purposes.

For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be edited.

NOTE Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function; this does

not affect the actual Beat setting of the Style itself.

[E] FAVORITE

Selects whether the edited record is entered to the FAVORITE display or not.

[1]TEMPO

Changes the Tempo. For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be changed.

[2] SECTION Selects the section that will automatically be called up set when the

record is selected. This is useful, for example, when you want to have a

selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro section. For

SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be changed.

[4]

[5]/

[6]

GENRE Selects the desired genre.

[7] GENRE NAME Creates a new genre.

[I]

DELETE RECORD

Deletes the currently selected record.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 73

Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song –

4 Enter the edits you’ve made to the record as described below.

Creating a new record

Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. The record is added to the ALL display. If you’ve entered the

record to the FAVORITE display in step 3, the record is added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE

display.

Overwriting an existing record

Press the [8] (OK) button. If you set the record as a Favorite in step 3, the record is added to the

FAVORITE display. When you edit the record in the FAVORITE display, the record is overwritten.

To cancel and quit the Edit operation, press the [8] (CANCEL) button.

The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and additionally created records as a

single file. Keep in mind that individual records (panel settings and song data) cannot be handled as separate

files.

1 Call up the Save display.

[MUSIC FINDER] → [7] FILES

2 Press the TAB [ ][ ] buttons to select the location for saving (USER or USB).

3 Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the current file.

All records are saved together as a single file.

Calling Up Music Finder Records Saved to USER or USB

1 Call up the File Selection display.

[MUSIC FINDER] → [7] FILES

2 Use the TAB [ ][ ] buttons to select USER or USB.

3 Press the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Music Finder file.

When the file is selected, a message is displayed according to the content of the file. Press the desired

button.

Saving the Record as a Single File

[F] REPLACE All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and

replaced with the records of the selected file.

NOTICE

Selecting “REPLACE” automatically deletes all your original records from internal mem-

ory. Make sure that all important data has been archived to another location beforehand.

[G] APPEND The records called up are added to the record currently in the instrument.

[H] CANCEL Selecting this button aborts the operation (the selected file is not called

up).

74 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

Registration Memory

– Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

Contents

Deleting or Renaming the Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Confirming the Registration Memory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

• Confirming the Registration Sequence Setting in the Main Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

• Saving the Registration Sequence Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the

REGISTRATION BANK Selection display, then select the Registration Memory bank

which contains the Registration you want to delete or rename.

NOTE No Registration banks will be shown in this display unless you have saved one or more beforehand.

2 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as

necessary.

3 Press the [7] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT display.

Registrations in the selected bank will be displayed.

Deleting or Renaming the Registration

CVP-701 Reference Manual 75

Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

4 To delete the Registration, press the [5] (DELETE) button; to rename it, press the

[1] (NAME) button.

5 Select a Registration you want to delete or rename by pressing one of the [A] – [D]

and [F] – [I] buttons.

The subsequent procedures are basically the same as those of renaming or deleting files described in the

Owner’s Manual.

You can call up the information display to take a look which Voices and Style are memorized to the [1] – [8]

buttons of a Registration Memory Bank.

1 Simultaneously press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons to call up the Registration

Bank Selection display, then use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Bank.

NOTE You can instantly call up the information display of the currently selected Registration Memory Bank by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and one

of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons in sequence.

2 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as

necessary.

3 Press the [6] (INFO) button to call up the information display.

By using the TAB [ ][ ] buttons, you can switch between the two information display pages:

information for the Registration Memory [1] – [4] buttons and information for the [5] – [8] buttons.

4 Press the [F] (CLOSE) button to close the information display.

NOTE If certain Voice parts are set to off, the Voice part names for the corresponding parts are shown in gray.

Confirming the Registration Memory Information

76 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single button press. However, there

may be times that you want certain items to remain the same, even when switching Registration Memory

setups. For example, you may want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same

accompaniment Style. This is where the Freeze function comes in handy. It lets you maintain the settings of

certain items and leave them unchanged, even when selecting other Registration Memory buttons.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [C] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE → TAB [ ][ ]

FREEZE

2 Determine the items to be “frozen.”

Select the desired item by using the [1] – [3] buttons, then enter or remove the checkmark by

using the [4]/[5] (MARK ON)/[4]/[5] (MARK OFF) buttons.

3 Press the [F] (REGISTRATION FREEZE) button to turn the Freeze function on.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display.

As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are, there may be times during a performance when you

want to quickly switch between settings — without having to take your hands from the keyboard. The

convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify, by

simply using the TAB [ ][ ] buttons or the pedal as you play.

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the

REGISTRATION BANK Selection display, then select the desired Registration Memory

bank to program a sequence.

2 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [C] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE → TAB [ ][ ]

REGISTRATION SEQUENCE

Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze)

Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence)

CVP-701 Reference Manual 77

Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

3 If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings, specify here how

the pedal will be used — to advance or to reverse through the sequence.

Use the [C] (REGIST+ PEDAL) button to select the pedal for advancing through the sequence.

Use the [D] (REGIST- PEDAL) button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence.

NOTE If you assign the function to a pedal here, the other function set in the PEDAL display (page 88) becomes invalid.

4 Use the [E] (SEQUENCE END) button to determine how Registration Sequence

behaves when reaching the end of the sequence.

•STOP Pressing the TAB [ ] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is

“stopped.”

•TOP The sequence starts again at the beginning.

•NEXT BANKThe sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory

Bank in the same folder.

5 Program the Sequence order, from left to right.

Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons on the panel, then press the [6]

(INSERT) button to input the number.

6 Press the [F] button to turn the Registration Sequence function on.

7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display.

NOTE If you do not close the setting display and it remains open, you cannot call up the Registration Sequence even when you press the pedal.

[1] –

[4]

CURSOR Moves the cursor.

[5] REPLACE Replaces the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Regis-

tration Memory number.

[6] INSERT Inserts the number of the currently selected Registration Memory number

before the cursor position.

[7] DELETE Deletes the number at the cursor position.

[8] CLEAR Deletes all numbers in the sequence.

Indicates the name of the

currently selected

Registration Memory Bank.

Indicates the Registration Memory numbers,

in the order of the current Registration

Sequence.

78 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –

Confirming the Registration Sequence Setting in the Main Display

In the Main display, you can confirm whether the Registration Memory numbers are called up according to

the sequence programmed on pages 76 – 77.

To shift the Registration Memory numbers, use the TAB [ ][ ] buttons when the Main display is shown.

When pedal operation has been set in step 3 on page 77, you can also use a pedal to select the Registration

Memory numbers in order.

Pressing the TAB [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously when the Main display is shown cancels the currently

selected Sequence number (the box indicator at the top right goes out). The first Sequence will be selected by

pressing one of the TAB [ ][ ] buttons or by pressing the pedal.

NOTE The pedal can be used for Registration Sequence no matter which display is called up (except for the display in step 3 on page 77).

Saving the Registration Sequence Settings

The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the

sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the Registration Memory Bank file. To store your

newly programmed Registration Sequence, save the current Registration Memory Bank file.

NOTICE

Keep in mind that all Registration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory Banks, unless you’ve saved it with the Regis-

tration Memory Bank file.

1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the

REGISTRATION BANK Selection display.

2 Call up MENU2 at the bottom right of the display by pressing the [8] button as

necessary.

3 Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the Bank file.

The Registration Sequence is indicated at

the top right of the Main display, letting you

confirm the currently selected number.

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

CVP-701 Reference Manual 79

Mixing Console

– Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

Contents

Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

• Adjusting Panning/Volume for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

• Changing the Voice for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Editing FILTER Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Editing TUNE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Editing EFFECT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

• Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

• Creating an Original Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Editing EQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Selecting the Master EQ Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Editing Master Compressor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

• Saving Master Compressor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

The MIXING CONSOLE display called up via the [MIXING CONSOLE] button consists of several pages of

parameters. Use the TAB [ ]/[ ] buttons to call up the desired page, and set various parameters for each

part to adjust the balance between parts and create your desired sound. Note that the Save operation for your

settings will differ depending on the part. For instructions, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Adjusting Panning/Volume for Each Part

1 Press the [D] (or [I]) button to select the PANPOT parameter or press the [E] (or [J])

button to select the VOLUME parameter.

2 Use the [1] – [8] buttons to adjust panning/volume for the desired part.

NOTE When the display for SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected, you can switch between the two by pressing the [A] (PART) button.

3 Save your settings.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 10.

Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters

PANPOT

VOLUME

80 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

Changing the Voice for Each Part

You can change the Voice for each keyboard part, Style channel or Song channel.

1 Press the [C] (or [H]) button to select the VOICE parameter.

2 Press one of the [1] – [8] buttons to select the desired part.

The Voice Selection display appears.

3 Select a Voice.

Press one of the Voice category selection buttons on the panel, then select a Voice by using the [A] – [J]

buttons.

NOTE When the display for SONG CH 1- 8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected, you can switch between the two by pressing the [A] (PART) button.

NOTE Some Voices (such as Organ Flutes) cannot be selected for Style channels.

NOTE Only Drum kit Voices and SFX kit Voices can be assigned to the RHY2 channel in the STYLE PART display.

NOTE When playing GM Song data, channel 10 can only be used for a Drum kit Voice.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIXING CONSOLE display.

5 Save your settings.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 10.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 81

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

Editing FILTER Parameters

[A] PART

This will be displayed only if SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected

for the part. Toggles between the two channel displays: SONG CH 1-8 and

SONG CH 9-16. For details, refer to chapter 10 in the Owner’s Manual.

[D]/[I] HARMONIC

CONTENT

Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (page 14) for each part.

[E]/[J] BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting the cut-

off frequency (page 14).

Editing TUNE Parameters

[A]/[B]/

[F]/[G]

PORTAMENTO

TIME

Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the

first note played on the keyboard to the next. The Portamento Time deter-

mines the pitch transition time. Higher values result in a longer pitch

change time. Setting this to “0” results in no effect. This parameter is

available when the selected keyboard part is set to Mono.

[C]/[H] PITCH BEND

RANGE

Determines the range of the PITCH BEND for each keyboard part (when

a pedal is assigned to this function; page 88). The range is from “0” to

“12” with each step corresponding to one semitone.

[D]/[I] OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up

or down for each keyboard part.

[E]/[J] TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part.

[1] –

[3]

TRANSPOSE Allows you to set transposition for overall sound of the instrument

(MASTER), Song playback (SONG), or the keyboard pitch (KBD),

respectively.

82 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

This instrument has an effect system featuring six separate blocks (Reverb, Chorus and DSP1-4). For each

block, you can assign the desired effect type individually. The effects are applied independently for each part

or globally for the entire sound according to the blocks: the effects of Reverb and Chorus blocks are applied

to all of the parts input to the Mixing Console, DSP1 is applied only to the Style and Song sounds (or applied

to a specific part of the Style or Song depending on the setting), and DSP2-4 are applied to the specific

keyboard parts and Song parts. Use these instructions to set up various effects for blocks and parts to enhance

the sound as desired.

Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block

NOTE When the display for SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected, you can switch between the two by pressing the [A] (PART) button.

1 Press the [F] (TYPE) button in the EFFECT Page of the Mixing Console display.

The Effect Type Selection display is called up.

2 Use the [1]/[2] buttons to select the effect BLOCK.

Editing EFFECT Parameters

Effect

Block

Applicable parts Effect characteristics

REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz

club.

CHORUS All parts Produces a rich, “fat” sound as if several identical instruments are being

played simultaneously. In addition, other type effects (such as reverb,

delay, etc.) can also be selected in this effect block.

DSP1 STYLE PART,

SONG

CHANNEL 1-16

This effect is applied only to Style/Song parts. When the “Connection”

parameter selected in step 3 of “Creating an Original Effect” section

(on page 83) is set to “System,” the DSP1 effect will be applied overall

to the Style and Song. When it is set to “Insertion,” the DSP1 effect will

be applied to a specific part of the Style or Song.

DSP2-4 RIGHT 1,

RIGHT 2, LEFT,

SONG

CHANNEL 1-16

For each of DSP2-4, you can select one of the parts or channels listed at

left. When you select “RIGHT2” for DSP2, for example, the DSP2

Effect is applied only to the Right 2 part. Note that if you select a Song

or Style which requires the DSP2-4 Blocks, the part assignment of

these three Blocks will be changed automatically with last priority

according to the data.

2 3 4 5

CVP-701 Reference Manual 83

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

3 Use the [3]/[4] buttons to select the part to which you want to apply the effect.

Note that a part cannot be selected if “REVERB” or “CHORUS” is selected, or if the CONNECTION

parameter of “DSP1” is set to “System” (in step 3 of “Creating an Original Effect” below). This is because

only one of the Effect Types can be selected to be commonly applied to all available Parts.

4 Use the [5]/[6] buttons to select the effect CATEGORY.

5 Use the [7]/[8] buttons to select the effect TYPE.

If you want to edit the effect parameters, go on to the next operation.

Creating an Original Effect

1 Once you’ve selected an Effect Block and Effect Type above, press the [F] button to

call up the display for editing the effect parameters.

2 Select the desired parameter for editing by using the [2] – [4] buttons, then

adjust the value by using the [5]/[6] buttons.

If you have selected the REVERB, CHORUS or DSP1 effect block, you can adjust the Effect Return Level

by pressing [7] button.

NOTE Keep in mind that in some cases noise may result if you adjust the effect parameters while playing the instrument.

3 If DSP 2 – 4 is selected as the Effect Block, edit the Variation parameter if desired.

Press the [7] (VARI. DETAIL) button to call up the Variation parameter, select a parameter via the

[2] – [4] buttons, and then use the [5]/[6] buttons to edit the value. This parameter is

effective only when the DSP VARIATION in the VOICE EFFECT display is set to on. To close the

Variation parameter display, press the [EXIT] button.

84 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the display for saving your original effect.

5 Use the [3] – [6] buttons to select the destination for saving the effect.

The maximum number for effects that can be saved differs depending on the effect block.

6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the effect.

In the Naming window called up via this operation, assign the name to the User Effect Type then press the

[8] (OK) button to save the User Effect Type. If you want to call up the User Effect Type saved here, use

the same procedure as in steps 4 – 5 of “Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block.”

Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands

that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. Usually an equalizer is used to

correct the sound from speakers to match the special character of the room. For example, you can cut some of

the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high

frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes.

Editing EQ Parameters

[A] PART This will be displayed only if SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected

for the part. Toggles between the two channel displays: SONG CH 1-8 and

SONG CH 9-16. For details, refer to chapter 10 in the Owner’s Manual.

[D]/[I] EQ HIGH Boosts or attenuates the high EQ band for each part.

[E]/[J] EQ LOW Boosts or attenuates the low EQ band for each part.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 85

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

The instrument possesses a high-quality five-band digital EQ. With this function, a final effect — tone

control — can be added to the output of your instrument. You can select one of the five preset EQ settings in

the MEQ display. You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the frequency bands, and

save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types.

1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset Master EQ type.

•FLAT: Flat EQ settings. The gain of each frequency is set to 0dB.

•LOW CUT: EQ setting for decreasing the level of the low frequencies, making the sound clearer.

• LOW BOOST: EQ setting for boosting the level of the low frequencies, making the sound more powerful.

• HIGH CUT: EQ setting for decreasing the level of the high frequencies, making the sound more mellow.

• HIGH BOOST: EQ setting for boosting the level of the high frequencies, making the sound brighter.

•USER1/2: Your own custom EQ settings saved in step 4.

The set parameters of the selected Master EQ type are automatically shown at the bottom of the display.

2 Use the [E]/[J] buttons to move the cursor to the GAIN row, then use the [1] –

[5] buttons to adjust the GAIN level to boost or cut each of the five bands.

To boost or cut all the five bands at the same time, use the [6]/[7] buttons.

3 Adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the band selected in

step 2.

To adjust the bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”), use the [C]/[H] buttons to move the cursor to the Q

row, then use the [2] – [4] buttons. The higher the value of Q, the narrower the band width.

To adjust the FREQ (center frequency), use the [D]/[I] buttons to move the cursor to the FREQ row, then

use the [1] – [5] buttons. The available FREQ range is different for each band.

4 Press the [F] or [G] (STORE 1 or 2) button to save the edited Master EQ type.

In the Naming display called up via this operation, assign the name then press the [8] (OK) button to

store your settings as a User Master EQ Type, which can be called up via the [A]/[B] buttons.

Selecting the Master EQ Type

Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”)

Gain

Freq

(Frequency)

5 bands →

LOW

EQ1

LOWMID

EQ2

MID

EQ3

HIGHMID

EQ4

HIGH

EQ5

2, 3

86 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

Compressor is an effect commonly used to limit and compress the dynamics (softness/loudness) of an audio

signal. For signals that vary widely in dynamics, such as vocals and guitar parts, it “squeezes” the dynamic

range, effectively making soft sounds louder and loud sounds softer. When used with gain to boost the overall

level, this creates a more powerful, more consistently high-level sound.

This instrument features a Master Compressor which is applied to the entire sound of this instrument.

Although preset Master Compressor settings are provided, you can also create and save your original Master

Compressor by adjusting the related parameters.

NOTE Master Compressor cannot be applied to an audio file or the Metronome sound.

Editing Master Compressor Settings

[F] ON/OFF Turns the Master Compressor effect on or off.

[1]/

[2]

TYPE Selects a Master Compressor type.

[3]/

[4]

THRESHOLD

OFFSET

Determines the threshold (minimum level at which compression starts).

[5]/

[6]

RATIO OFFSET Determines the ratio of compression (how much the dynamic range is

compressed).

[7]/

[8]

OUTPUT GAIN

OFFSET

Determines the output level.

The indication “GAIN REDUCTION”

shows the Gain Reduction

(compressed level) while “OUTPUT”

shows the output level according to

the instrument sound in real time.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 87

Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –

Saving Master Compressor Settings

The Master Compressor settings you have edited on page 86 can be saved as a User Compressor type.

1 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to enter the USER MASTER COMPRESSOR display.

2 Select the destination to which the User Master Compressor is to be saved, by using

the [3] – [6] buttons.

3 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to open the SAVE display.

4 Enter the name of the edited Compressor type, then press the [8] (OK) button to

actually save the settings.

5 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

The saved Compressor type is shown in the TYPE selection at the bottom left of the display and can be

selected in the same way as the preset types.

88 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

Connections

– Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

Contents

Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

• Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Wireless LAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

• Infrastructure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

• Ad Hoc Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

MIDI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

• MIDI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

• MIDI Transmit Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

• MIDI Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

• Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

• Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal

In addition to the footswitch or foot controller, the three piano pedals installed to the instrument (Right,

Center and Left pedals) can also be assigned to various functions here. The following explanations cover the

related operations and assignable functions (parameters).

NOTE For information on how to connect a Footswitch or Foot Controller, refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 11.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [ ][ ] PEDAL

2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select one of the three pedals or the AUX-connected pedal,

to which the function is to be assigned.

Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings

CVP-701 Reference Manual 89

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

3 Use the [1] buttons to select the function to be assigned to the pedal specified in

step 2.

For information on available parameters, see pages 89 – 91.

NOTE You can also assign other functions to the pedal — Punch in/out of Song (page 57) and Registration Sequence (page 76). If you assign multiple func-

tions to the pedal, the priority is: Punch in/out of Song → Registration Sequence → functions assigned here.

4 Use the [2] – [8] buttons to set the details of the selected functions (the part

for which the function is applied, etc.).

The available parameters differ depending on the function selected in step 3.

5 When you have selected the left or center pedal in step 2, press the [H] (SWITCH WITH

R1 VOICE) button to turn this parameter OFF.

This setting locks the pedal function so that it does not change automatically when you change the Right 1

Voice.

6 If necessary, set the polarity of the pedal by using the [I] button.

Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the instrument.

For example, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on, while pressing a different

make/brand of pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this setting to reverse the operation.

 Assignable Pedal Functions

For functions indicated with “*”, use only the foot controller; proper operation cannot be done with a

footswitch.

ARTICULATION When you use a Super Articulation Voice that has an effect assigned to the

pedal/footswitch, you can enable the effect by pressing the pedal/footswitch.

You can turn this function on or off for each keyboard part on this display.

VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume. This function is

available only for the pedal connected to the instrument’s AUX PEDAL jack.

SUSTAIN Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain. When you press and hold the

pedal, all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain. Releasing the

pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. If you are using the right

pedal or connected foot controller, the “HALF PEDAL POINT” parameter

allows you to specify how far down you should press on the pedal until the

damper effect starts working.

SOSTENUTO Allows you to use a pedal to control the Sostenuto effect. If you play a note or

chord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note(s), the notes

will sustain as long as the pedal is held. However, all subsequent notes will not

sustain. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other

notes are played staccato.

NOTE This function will not affect any of the Organ Flutes and only some of the Super Articulation Voices, even if

this has been assigned to the Foot Pedals.

SOFT Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect. Pressing this pedal reduces

the volume and changes the timbre of the notes you play. This is effective only

for certain appropriate Voices. You can turn this pedal function on or off for

each keyboard part on this display. If you are using the right pedal or connected

foot controller, the “HALF PEDAL POINT” parameter allows you to specify

how far down you should press on the pedal until the soft effect starts working.

90 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

GLIDE When the pedal is pressed, the pitch changes, and then returns to normal pitch

when the pedal is released. The following parameters can be set for this func-

tion on this display.

UP/DOWN

Determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered).

RANGE

Determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones.

ON SPEED

Determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is pressed.

OFF SPEED

Determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is released.

LEFT, RIGHT 1, 2

Turns this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part.

PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while

the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style

(i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento

time can also be adjusted form the Mixing Console display (page 81). This

function does not affect certain Natural Voices, which would not sound appro-

priately with this function.

NOTE This function will not affect any of the Organ Flutes, Super Articulation Voices and only some of the Super

Articulation Voices, even if this has been assigned to the Foot Pedals.

PITCH BEND* Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal. This

function can be assigned to the right pedal or connected foot controller. The

following parameters can be set for this function on this display.

UP/DOWN

Determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered).

RANGE

Determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones.

LEFT, RIGHT 1, 2

Turns this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part.

MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. Moreover, various

effects can be added to the Super Articulation Voice. The effect becomes

deeper when pressing down the foot controller. You can turn this pedal func-

tion on or off for each keyboard part on this display.

MODULATION

(ALT)

This is a slight variation on MODULATION above, in which the effects (wave-

form) can be switched on/off by each press of the pedal/footswitch. The modu-

lation effect is alternately turned on and off each time the pedal/footswitch is

pressed. You can turn this function on or off for each keyboard part on this dis-

play.

DSP VARIATION Switches Voice Effect DSP VARIATION on and off.

VIBE ROTOR ON/OFF Switches the VIBRATE SW parameter on and off when the VIBE VIBRATE

effect type is selected.

KEYBOARD

HARMONY

Switches the Harmony or Echo effect on and off.

TALK Switches the microphone setup settings between Vocal and Talk.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 91

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

SCORE PAGE +/- While the Song is stopped, you can turn to the next/previous score page (one

page at a time).

LYRICS PAGE +/- While the Song is stopped, you can turn to the next/previous lyrics page (one

page at a time).

SONG PLAY/PAUSE Same as the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button.

TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.

SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNC START] button.

SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC STOP] button.

INTRO 1–3 Same as the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons.

MAIN A–D Same as the MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] buttons.

FILL DOWN Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the but-

ton on the immediate left.

FILL SELF Plays a fill-in.

FILL BREAK Plays a break.

FILL UP Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the but-

ton on the immediate right.

ENDING1–3 Same as the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons.

FADE IN/OUT Switches Fade In /Fade Out function on and off.

FINGERD/FING ON

BASS

The pedal alternately switches the Chord Fingering types between the Fingered

and Fingering On Bass.

BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held

even if the chord is changed during Style playback. If the fingering is set to “AI

FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work.

PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4] – [8]

buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument.

NOTE When you select the percussion instrument by pressing a key on the keyboard, the velocity with which you

press the key determines the percussion volume.

RIGHT 1 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button.

RIGHT 2 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button.

LEFT ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button.

OTS +/- Calls up the next/previous One Touch Setting.

92 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

By using a USB wireless LAN adaptor UD-WL01 (sold separately), you can connect this instrument with an

iPhone/iPad via a wireless network. For general operating instructions, refer to the iPhone/iPad Connection

Manual. This section covers only operations that are specific to this instrument.

Before starting operations, make sure that the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal and call up the setup display via [FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU 2 →

[H] WIRELESS LAN.

NOTE If the USB wireless LAN adaptor is not recognized by the instrument, “WIRELESS LAN” for the [H] button is not shown. When “WIRELESS LAN” is not shown

even though a USB wireless LAN adaptor has been connected, turn the instrument off then on again.

Infrastructure Mode

Wireless LAN Settings

[A]/[B] Selects the network.

[G] UPDATE Updates the network list on the display.

[I] DETAIL Sets the detailed parameters. After making these settings, press one of the

[7]/[8] (SAVE) button to actually save them.

IP ADDRESS:

Sets the IP address and other related parameters.

OTHERS:

When the instrument is connected to the network with the Infrastructure

Mode, the current time is shown on the Main display.

You can set the Time Zone via the [B] button and Daylight Saving Time

via the [C] button for your local time.

[1]/

[2]

WPS Connects this instrument to the network via WPS. After pressing this but-

ton, press the WPS button on your access point within two minutes.

NOTE Make sure that your access point supports WPS. About the confirmation and changes in the access

point settings, refer to the manual of the access point.

[3]/

[4]

MODE

CHANGE

Switches to the Ad Hoc Mode.

[5]/

[6]

INITIALIZE Initializes the connection setup to the default factory status.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 93

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

Ad Hoc Mode

[7]/

[8]

CONNECT Connects to the selected network.

If you select “Other” by using the [A]/[B] buttons, this calls up the Man-

ual Setup display in which you set the SSID, security method, and pass-

word. After entering those, press one of the [7]/[8] buttons in

the Manual Setup display to connect to the network.

[I] DETAIL Sets the detailed parameters. After making these settings, press one of the

[7]/[8] (SAVE) button to actually save them.

WIRELESS NETWORK:

Sets the SSID, security, password, and channel.

IP ADDRESS:

Sets the IP address and other related parameters.

OTHERS:

Enters the Host name or shows MAC address, etc.

[3]/

[4]

MODE

CHANGE

Switches to the Infrastructure Mode.

[5]/

[6]

INITIALIZE Initializes the connection setup to the default factory status.

94 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. This instrument gives you a set of ten

pre-programmed templates that let you instantly and easily reconfigure the instrument to match your

particular MIDI application or external device. Also, you can edit the pre-programmed templates and save up

to ten of your original templates to the USER display.

NOTE You can save all your original templates as a single file to USB flash drive: [FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 → [G] SYSTEM → TAB [ ][ ]

SETUP FILES → [G] MIDI SETUP FILES. See page 106.

1 Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [I] MIDI

2 Select a pre-programmed template from the PRESET Page (page 95).

If you have already created an original template and saved it to the USER Page, you can also select that

template from the USER Page.

3 Press the [8] (EDIT) button to call up the MIDI display to edit the selected template.

4 Use the TAB [ ][ ] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.

•SYSTEM MIDI System Settings (page 96)

• TRANSMIT MIDI Transmission Settings (page 97)

• RECEIVE MIDI Reception Settings (page 98)

•BASS Settings for the bass note of chord for Style playback via MIDI reception data (page 99)

• CHORD DETECT Settings for the chord type for Style playback via MIDI reception data (page 99)

5 When you’ve finished editing, press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIDI template

Selection display.

6 Select the USER tab display by using the TAB [ ][ ] buttons, then press the [6]

(SAVE) button to save the edited template.

MIDI Settings

CVP-701 Reference Manual 95

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

 Pre-programmed MIDI Templates

All Parts Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2, and LEFT), with

the exception of Song parts.

KBD & STYLE Basically the same as “ALL PARTS” with the exception of how keyboard parts

are managed. The right-hand parts are handled as “UPPER” instead of RIGHT

1 and 2 and the left-hand part is handled as “LOWER.”

Master KBD In this setting, the instrument functions as a “master” keyboard, playing and

controlling one or more connected tone generators or other devices (such as a

computer/sequencer).

Song All transmit channels are set to correspond to Song channels 1–16. This is used

to play Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an

external sequencer.

Clock Ext Playback or recording (Song, Style, etc.) synchronizes with an external MIDI

clock instead of the instrument’s internal clock. This template should be used

when you wish to set the tempo on the MIDI device connected to the instru-

ment.

MIDI Accord1 MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone

generators from the keyboard and bass/chord buttons of the accordion. This

template lets you play melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback

on the instrument with the left-hand buttons.

MIDI Accord2 Basically the same as “MIDI Accord1” above, with the exception that the

chord/bass notes you play with your left hand on a MIDI Accordion are recog-

nized also as MIDI note events.

MIDI Pedal1 MIDI pedal units allow you play connected tone generators with your feet

(especially convenient for playing single note bass parts). This template lets

you play/control the chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit.

MIDI Pedal2 This template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI

pedal unit.

MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received.

96 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

MIDI Settings

The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM Page in step 4 on page 94.

Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the parameters (below), then set the ON/OFF status by using the [1] –

[8] buttons.

1 Local Control

Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the

instrument controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal Voices to be played

directly from the keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally

disconnected from the instrument’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the

keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play

the instrument’s internal Voices, and use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer

and/or play an external tone generator.

2 Clock setting, etc.

 CLOCK

Determines whether the instrument is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received

from an external device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the instrument is being used alone

or as a master keyboard to control external devices. If you are using the instrument with an external

sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it to that device, set this

parameter to the appropriate setting: MIDI, USB 1, or USB 2. In this case, make sure that the external

device is connected properly (e.g., to the instrument’s MIDI IN terminal), and that it is properly

transmitting a MIDI clock signal. When this is set for control by an external device (MIDI, USB 1 or USB

2), the Tempo is indicated as “Ext.” in the Main display.

NOTE If the Clock is set to something other than INTERNAL, the Style or Song cannot be played from the panel buttons.

NOTE When a USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, the “WIRELESS LAN” parameter can also be selected.

 TRANSMIT CLOCK

Turns MIDI clock (F8) transmission on or off. When set to OFF, no MIDI clock or Start/Stop data is

transmitted even if a Song or Style is played back.

 RECEIVE TRANSPOSE

Determines whether or not the instrument’s transpose setting is applied to the note events received by the

instrument via MIDI.

 START/STOP

Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect Song or Style playback.

3 MESSAGE SW (Message Switch)

 SYS/EX.

The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI System Exclusive messages on or off. The “Rx” setting

turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclusive messages generated by external

equipment on or off.

CVP-701 Reference Manual 97

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

 CHORD SYS/EX.

The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI Chord System Exclusive data (chord detect, root and

type) on or off. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI chord exclusive data

generated by external equipment on or off.

MIDI Transmit Settings

The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT Page in step 4 on page 94. This determines which parts will

be sent as MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent.

1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons or [1]/[2] buttons to select the part for changing

transmit settings.

With the exception of the two parts below, the configuration of the parts is the same as those already

explained elsewhere in the Owner’s Manual.

UPPER

A keyboard part played on the right side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices (RIGHT 1

and/or 2).

LOWER

A keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices. This is not

affected by the on/off status of the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

2 Use the [3] buttons to select a channel via which the selected part will be

transmitted.

NOTE If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts, the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel — resulting in unex-

pected sounds and possible glitches in the connected MIDI device.

NOTE Protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper Song channels 1-16 are set to be transmitted.

3 Use the [4] – [8] button to determine the types of data to be sent.

The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANSMIT/RECEIVE display.

NOTE (Note events) .........page 64

CONTROL CHANGE ......page 64

PROGRAM CHANGE .....page 64

PITCH BEND ...................page 64

AFTER TOUCH................page 64

231

The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16)

flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on

the channel(s).

NOTE If “WLAN” is shown, this instrument can handle

MIDI messages received via the USB wireless

LAN adaptor connected to the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminal. When “WLAN” is not shown although

the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected, turn

the instrument off then on again.

98 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

MIDI Receive Settings

The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE Page in step 4 on page 94. This determines which parts will

receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channels the data will be received.

1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons or [1]/[2] buttons to select the channel to be received.

The instrument can receive MIDI messages over 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) by USB connection.

2 Use the [3] buttons to select the part via which the selected channel will be

received.

With the exception of the two parts below, the configuration of the parts is the same as those already

explained elsewhere in the Owner’s Manual.

KEYBOARD

The received note messages control the instrument’s keyboard performance.

EXTRA PART 1–5

There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not

used by the instrument itself. The instrument can be used as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator by

using these five parts in addition to the parts.

3 Use the [4] – [8] button to determine the types of data to be received.

MIDI transmission/reception via the USB terminal and MIDI terminals

The relationship between the [MIDI] terminals and the [USB] terminal which can be used for

transmitting/receiving 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) of the MIDI messages is as follows:

231

The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16)

flash briefly whenever any data is received on the

channel(s).

NOTE If “WLAN” is shown, this instrument can handle

MIDI messages received via the USB wireless

LAN adaptor connected to the [USB TO DEVICE]

terminal. When “WLAN” is not shown although

the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected, turn

the instrument off then on again.

 MIDI reception  MIDI transmission

[MIDI IN] jack [USB TO HOST] jack [MIDI OUT] jack [USB TO HOST] jack

Port handling

USB2USB1

Merge

MIDI/USB1/

WLAN 01–16

USB2

01–16

MIDI/USB/WLAN 01–16

Wireless

LAN

Wireless LAN

CVP-701 Reference Manual 99

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive

The explanations here apply to the BASS Page in step 4 on page 94. These settings let you determine the bass

note for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off messages received at

the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the bass notes of the chords of Style playback. The bass note

will be detected regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or split point settings. When several channels are

simultaneously set to “ON,” the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels

1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the channel.

2 Use the [1] – [8] buttons to set the desired channel to ON or OFF.

You can also set all channels to OFF by pressing the [I] (ALL OFF) button.

Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive

The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT Page in step 4 on page 94. These settings let you

determine the chord type for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off

messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the notes for detecting chords in Style

playback. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The chord types will be detected

regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or Split Point settings. When several channels are simultaneously set to

“ON,” the chord type is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels.

The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the BASS display above.

100 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Utility / System – Making Global Settings –

Utility / System

– Making Global Settings –

Contents

CONFIG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

CONFIG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

PARA METER LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

OWNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

BACKUP/RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

SETUP FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [J] UTILITY → TAB [ ][ ] CONFIG1

1 Fade In/Out

These parameters determine the behavior when the Style or Song playback is faded in/out.

CONFIG1

[3] FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from mini-

mum to maximum (range of 0 – 20.0 seconds).

[4]FADE OUT

TIME

Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go from maxi-

mum to minimum (range of 0 – 20.0 seconds).

[5]FADE OUT

HOLD TIME

Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out (range

of 0 – 5.0 seconds).

Select the desired parameter:

1 Fade In/Out

2 Metronome

3 Tap Percussion

4 AUTO POWER OFF

5 LCD BRIGHTNESS

CVP-701 Reference Manual 101

Utility / System – Making Global Settings –

2 Metronome

3 Tap Percussion

This allows you to set the drum sound and the velocity which will sound when the Tap function is used.

4 AUTO POWER OFF

5 LCD BRIGHTNESS

Refer to the Owner’s Manual.

[2] VOLUME Determines the level of the metronome sound.

[3] –

[5]

SOUND Determines which sound is used for the metronome.

BELL OFF..................Conventional metronome sound, with no bell

accent.

BELL ON ...................Conventional metronome sound, with bell

accent.

ENGLISH VOICE ......Count in English

GERMAN VOICE......Count in German

JAPANESE VOICE ....Count in Japanese

FRENCH VOICE .......Count in French

SPANISH VOICE.......Count in Spanish

[6]/

[7]

TIME

SIGNATURE

Determines the time signature of the metronome sound.

[2] –

[4]

PERCUSSION Selects the instrument.

[5]/

[6]

VELOCITY Sets the velocity.

[4]/

[5]

AUTO POWER

OFF

Determines the amount of time that elapses before the power is automat-

ically turned off. The setting range is DISABLED/5/10/15/30/60/120

(minutes).

102 CVP-701 Reference Manual

Utility / System – Making Global Settings –

Call up the operation display.

[FUNCTION] → TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 → [J] UTILITY → TAB [ ][ ] CONFIG2

1 Speaker-related settings

CONFIG2

[1]/

[2]

SPEAKER Determines whether or not the speaker will sound.

HEADPHONE SW

Speaker sounds normally, but is cut off when headphones are inserted

to the PHONES jack.

ON:

Speaker sound is always on.

OFF:

Speaker sound is off. You can only hear the instrument sound via the

headphones.

[3]/

[4]

STEREOPHONIC

OPTIMIZER

Turns the Stereophonic Optimizer on or off.

•On......This function is effective on the VRM Voices sounded from

the headphone(s) connected to the [PHONE] jack(s).

NOTE In case the “Speaker” setting above is “On” and headphone(s) are connected to

the [PHONES] jack(s), this function is effective on the VRM Voices from the

headphone(s) as well as from the speakers of the instrument.

NOTE In case the headphone(s) are connected to the [PHONES] jack(s) and external

audio devices are connected to the AUX OUT[L/L+R]/[R] jacks, this function is

effective on the VRM Voices from the headphone(s) as well as from the audio

devices.

•Off.....The effect of Stereophonic Optimizer is not applied.

[5]/

[6]

AUX IN NOISE

GATE

This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the AUX IN

falls below a specified level.

[7] I.A. CONTROL

ON/OFF

I.A. Control (Intelligent Acoustic Control) is a function which auto-

matically adjusts and controls the sound quality according to the over-

all volume of the instrument. Even when the volume is low, it permits

both low sounds and high sounds to be clearly heard. I.A. Control is

effective only from the sound output of the instrument speakers.

[8] I.A. CONTROL

DEPTH

This sets the depth of the I.A. Control. The higher the value, the more

clearly that low and high sounds are heard at lower volume levels.

Select the desired parameter:

1 Speaker

2 Voice Category Button

Options/Display-related Set-

tings

CVP-701 Reference Manual 103

Utility / System – Making Global Settings –

2 Voice Category Button Options/Display-related settings

[1] STYLE TEMPO Selects whether the default tempo of each Style is displayed above the

Style name or not in the Style Selection display.

[2]VOICE

NUMBER

Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number are shown in the

Voice Selection display. This is useful when you want to check which

bank select MSB/LSB values and program change number you need to

specify when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device.

NOTE The numbers displayed here start from “1.” Accordingly the actual MIDI program change numbers

are one lower, since that number system starts from “0.”

NOTE For the GS Voices, the Display Voice Number is not available (the program change numbers are not

shown).

[3] TIME STAMP Determines whether the time stamp of a file is shown on the USER/USB

tabs of the File Selection display or not.

NOTE When the instrument is connected to a network via the USB wireless LAN adaptor (UD-WL01), the

current time is taken from the network and displayed.

[5]/

[6]

VOICE

Transcripción de documentos

CV P- 701 Reference Manual This Reference Manual explains advanced features of this instrument that are not explained in the Owner’s Manual. Please read the Owner’s Manual first, before reading this Reference Manual. EN Contents 1 Piano Room – Enjoying Piano Performance – 3 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 3 Voice Characteristics .........................................................3 Selecting GM&XG, MegaVoices and Other Voices from the Panel....................................................................5 Adjusting the Depth of Reverb and Chorus for VRM Voices .......................................................................5 Adjusting the Tuning Curve and Volume of the Key-Off Sound for Piano Voices .....................................................6 Confirm the Assignments of Drum Kit Voices ....................7 Selecting the Harmony/Echo type......................................8 Pitch-Related Settings .......................................................9 Editing Voices (Voice Set) ...............................................12 Editing Organ Flutes Parameters.....................................17 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 18 Style Playback Settings ...................................................18 Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with Your Left Hand....................................21 Searching for Suitable Songs for the Current Style (Repertoire)......................................................................22 Memorizing an Original One Touch Setting .....................23 Confirming the One Touch Setting Contents ...................23 Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) ............................24 8 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – 69 Registering a Song, Audio or Style File (SONG/AUDIO/ STYLE) ............................................................................69 Creating a Set of Favorite Records..................................71 Editing Records................................................................72 Saving the Record as a Single File..................................73 9 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 74 Deleting or Renaming the Registration ............................74 Confirming the Registration Memory Information ............75 Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) .....................76 Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence) ..................................................76 10 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 79 Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters ......................................79 Editing FILTER Parameters .............................................81 Editing TUNE Parameters................................................81 Editing EFFECT Parameters ...........................................82 Editing EQ Parameters ....................................................84 Selecting the Master EQ Type .........................................85 Editing Master Compressor Settings ...............................86 4 Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – 38 11 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 88 Editing Music Notation Settings .......................................38 Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback .................................................................40 Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat settings, Channel settings, Guide Function)...................................41 Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings .................................88 Wireless LAN Settings .....................................................92 MIDI Settings ...................................................................94 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 46 Recording Style Playback First, Then Melodies ..............46 Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) ...........................49 6 USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playback and Recording Audio Files – 66 7 Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance – 66 12 Utility / System – Making Global Settings – 100 CONFIG1 .......................................................................100 CONFIG2 .......................................................................102 PARAMETER LOCK......................................................104 USB................................................................................104 OWNER .........................................................................105 BACKUP/RESTORE......................................................105 SETUP FILES ................................................................106 RESET ...........................................................................107 Index 108 Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk)......................................................................66 * Each chapter in this Reference Manual corresponds to the relevant chapters in the Owner’s Manual Using the PDF manual • To quickly jump to items and topics of interest, click on the desired items in the “Bookmarks” index to the left of the main display window. (Click the “Bookmarks” tab to open the index if it is not displayed.) • Click the page numbers that appear in this manual to go directly to the corresponding page. • Select “Find” or “Search” from the Adobe Reader “Edit” menu and enter a keyword to locate related information anywhere in the document. NOTE The names and positions of menu items may vary according to the version of Adobe Reader being used. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. 2 CVP-701 Reference Manual Piano Room – Enjoying Piano Performance – These operations are fully explained in the Owner’s Manual. Refer to the corresponding chapter in the Owner’s Manual. 1 2 Voices Voices – Playing the Keyboard – – Playing the Keyboard – Contents Voice Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Selecting GM&XG, MegaVoices and Other Voices from the Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Adjusting the Depth of Reverb and Chorus for VRM Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Adjusting the Tuning Curve and Volume of the Key-Off Sound for Piano Voices . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Confirm the Assignments of Drum Kit Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Selecting the Harmony/Echo type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Pitch-Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 • Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 • Scale Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 • Changing the Part Assignment of the TRANSPOSE Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Editing Voices (Voice Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 • Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 • Disabling Automatic Selection of Voice Sets (Effects, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Editing Organ Flutes Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Voice Characteristics The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Voice name in the Voice Selection display. VRM (Virtual Resonance Modeling) See the Owner’s Manual, chapter 2. Natural! Natural! Voices are high quality sounds on many specialist sampling techniques. They are especially suited to recreating Piano and other keyboard instruments. Live! Live! Voices feature stereo sampling, to reproduce accurately the stereo image of an acoustic instrument, as well as the ambience of the room it was recorded in. S.Art! (Super Articulation) See the Owner’s Manual, chapter 2. CVP-701 Reference Manual 3 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – Cool! Cool! Voices reproduce the complex characteristics of Electric Instruments, by utilizing sophisticated programming techniques in both voicing, and the use of DSP effects. Sweet! Sweet! Voices are acoustic instruments which feature the sampled vibrato of the original player, creating a far more realistic and emotional performance than synthesized vibrato. Drums Drum & Percussion instruments are mapped across the keyboard so you can play them directly, or use in music production. Live! Drums Stereo sampling is used for these high definition Drum and Percussion instruments, which are mapped across the keyboard so you can play them directly, or use in music production. SFX Special percussion and sound effects are mapped across the keyboard, so you can play them directly, or use in music production. Live! SFX Stereo sampling is used for these high definition special percussion and sound effects, which are mapped across the keyboard so you can play them directly, or use in music production. Organ Flutes! OrganFlutes! lets you create your own Organ registrations, by combining Organ Flute Footages at different pitches, just like a real organ. See page 17 for details. MegaVoice MegaVoice is a special Voice format designed for use in styles and songs, not for live performance. Different velocity ranges are used to select dramatically different playing styles simultaneously, and without changing the voice. Actual sound maps for the MegaVoices are given in the separate Data List booklet that comes with your instrument. NOTE MegaVoices are not compatible with other models even though the model may have those types of Voices installed. Any Song or Style data you’ve created on the instrument using these Voices will not sound properly when played back on other instruments. NOTE MegaVoices sound differently depending on the keyboard range, velocity, touch, etc. Hence, if you apply a harmony or echo effect, change the transpose setting or change the Voice Set parameters, unexpected or undesired sounds may result. 4 CVP-701 Reference Manual Selecting GM&XG, MegaVoices and Other Voices from the Panel The GM&XG Voices and MegaVoice cannot be directly called up from the VOICE category selection buttons. However, they can be called up via panel operation by following the procedure below. 2 3 In the Main display, select the keyboard part to which the desired Voice is to be assigned. Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice Selection display. Press the [8] (UP) button to call up the Voice categories. 3 4 5 6 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 1 4 Press the [2] (P2) button to display Page 2. Press the desired [A] – [J] button to call up the Voice Selection display of GM&XG Voices, GM2 Voices, etc. Select the desired Voice. Adjusting the Depth of Reverb and Chorus for VRM Voices When you select a Piano Voice compatible with VRM (referred to as VRM Voices), you can adjust the depth of the Reverb and Chorus effect that is applied to the VRM Voices. 1 Select the VRM Voice. Press the VOICE category [PIANO] button to call up the Voice Selection display, then select a Voice having a “VRM” indication above its name. CVP-701 Reference Manual 5 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [F] VOICE SETTING → TAB [L][R] PIANO 3 4 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 3 4 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “1. VRM/DAMPER RESONANCE DEPTH/STRING RESONANCE DEPTH/REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH.” Use the [5]/[6] buttons for adjusting the reverb depth and the [7]/[8] buttons for the chorus depth applied to the VRM Voices. This setting is applied commonly to all parts for which VRM Voices are selected. Adjusting the Tuning Curve and Volume of the Key-Off Sound for Piano Voices You can adjust the tuning curve and volume of the key-off sound (the subtle sound that occurs when you release a key) for Piano Voices. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [F] VOICE SETTING → TAB [L][R] PIANO Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “2. TUNING CURVE/KEY OFF SAMPLING DEPTH.” 2 3 6 CVP-701 Reference Manual 3 Use the [3] – [6] buttons to select the appropriate settings or to adjust the value. [3]/ [4] TUNING CURVE Determines the tuning curve. Select “FLAT” if you want the tuning curve of the piano Voice to most accurately match that of other instruments Voices. STRETCH: Tuning curve often employed by piano tuners to make the upper octaves sound more natural. Best for solo piano performance. FLAT: Tuning curve in which the frequencies of the notes are repeated for each octave over the entire keyboard range. KEY OFF SAMPLE 2 Adjusts the volume of the key-off sound. Voices – Playing the Keyboard – [5]/ [6] Confirm the Assignments of Drum Kit Voices When you select one of the specific Drum Kit Voices below, you can confirm the key assignments in the Drum Kit Tutor display. Compatible Drum Kit Voices: StandardKit1, StandardKit2, HitKit, RoomKit, RockKit, JazzKit, BrushKit, SymphonyKit, StudioKit, PowerKit1, PowerKit2, AcousticKit, RealDrums Call up the Drum Kit Tutor display. Select the compatible Drum Kit Voice in the Voice Selection display → [8] MENU1 → [4] (DRUM KIT) 2 1 NOTE The Drum Kit Tutor display is not available for some Drum Kit Voices for which the “DRUM KIT” button is not available in MENU1 at the bottom of the Voice Selection display. In the default setting, the C3-B3 range of the keyboard is shown for confirming the assignments. When you press a key, the instrument name assigned to the key is shown in the display. To confirm other assignments outside that range, use the [D]/[E] or [I]/[J] buttons to shift the keyboard illustration left or right by one octave in the display, or press a key in another octave. CVP-701 Reference Manual 7 Selecting the Harmony/Echo type This function lets you apply harmonies to your right hand performance according to the chords you play with your left hand, and trigger automatic echo or tremolo even by pressing a single note or two notes. 1 Press the [VOICE EFFECT] button. 2 Turn the Keyboard Harmony on by pressing the [I] (KEYBOARD HARMONY) button. 3 Call up the operation display by pressing the [J] (TYPE SELECT) button. 4 2 Use the [1] – [3] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo type. The Harmony/Echo types are divided into the following groups, depending on the particular effect applied. Voices – Playing the Keyboard – Harmony Types These types apply the harmony effect to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the chord specified in the left-hand section of the keyboard. (Note that the “1+5” and “Octave” settings are not affected by the chord.) Multi Assign Type This type applies a special effect to chords played in the right-hand section of the keyboard. Echo Types These types apply echo effects to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo.  Harmony Types When one of the Harmony Types is selected, the Harmony effect is applied to the note played in the righthand section of the keyboard according to the type selected above and the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard shown below. If you want to use these Types, play back the style or set the “STOP ACMP” parameter (page 19) to a setting other than “DISABLED.” Split Point Split Point RIGHT 1 and 2 Voices Chord section for Style playback and Harmony effect Split Point (for Style playback) LEFT Voice and chord section for Harmony effect Split Point (for the Voice) LEFT Voice Chord section for Style playback and Harmony effect 8 CVP-701 Reference Manual RIGHT 1 and 2 Voices  Multi Assign Type The Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). Both keyboard parts [RIGHT 1] and [RIGHT 2] should be turned on when using the Multi Assign effect. The Right 1 and Right 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in the order you play.  Echo Types When one of the Echo Types is selected, the corresponding effect (echo, tremolo, trill) is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo, regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] and the LEFT part on/off status. Keep in mind that Trill only works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously (last two notes if more than two notes are held), and it plays those notes alternately. 2 Use the [4] – [8] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo settings. The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type. [4] VOLUME This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines the level of the harmony/echo notes generated by the Harmony/Echo effect. [5] SPEED This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. It determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects. [6] ASSIGN This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” This lets you determine the keyboard part via which the harmony/echo notes will be sounded. [7] CHORD NOTE ONLY This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected. When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to notes (played in the right-hand section of the keyboard) that belong to a chord played in the chord section of the keyboard. [8] TOUCH LIMIT This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value). Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 5 Pitch-Related Settings Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument You can fine-tune the pitch of the entire instrument — a useful feature when playing the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. Please note that the Tuning function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices with name “*** kit” and audio files. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [E] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [L][R] MASTER TUNE Use the [4]/[5] buttons to set the tuning in 0.2 Hz steps, from 414.8–466.8 Hz. Press the both 4 or 5’s [] and [] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the factory setting of 440.0 Hz. CVP-701 Reference Manual 9 Scale Tuning You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for specific historical periods or music genres. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [E] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [L][R] SCALE TUNE Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale. 2 The tuning of each note for the currently selected scale is shown. Voices – Playing the Keyboard –  Preset Scale types 10 EQUAL The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today. PURE MAJOR, PURE MINOR These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and a cappella singing. PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning is slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MEAN-TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale. WERCKMEISTER, KIRNBERGER This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord. ARABIC1, ARABIC2 Use these tunings when playing Arabic music. CVP-701 Reference Manual Change the following settings as necessary. [2] BASE NOTE Determines the base note for each scale. When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes. [3] – [5] TUNE Select the desired note to be tuned by using the [3] buttons and tune it in cents by using the [4]/[5] buttons. 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 3 NOTE In musical terms a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone. (100 cents equal one semitone.) [6]/ [7] PART SELECT [8] MARK ON/OFF Select the part to which the Scale Tune setting is applied by using the [6]/[7] buttons. Then press the [8] button to add a checkmark or press the [8] button to remove the checkmark. NOTE To register the Scale Tune settings to the Registration Memory, be sure to checkmark the SCALE item in the REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS display. NOTE If a VRM Voice is selected as the RIGHT1 part, the resonance of all VRM Voices is set to the same scale type as that of the RIGHT1 part. If a Voice other than a VRM Voice is selected as the RIGHT1 part, the resonance of any other VRM Voices is set to “Equal.” Changing the Part Assignment of the TRANSPOSE Buttons You can determine to which part (keyboard, Song or both) the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons are applied. This lets you transpose the pitch of the keyboard but not that of the Song (or vice versa) — allowing you to play along with a Song in a more comfortable key, for example. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [L][R] KEYBOARD/PANEL 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “2. TRANSPOSE ASSIGN.” 3 Press the [4]/[5] buttons to select the desired transpose type. KEYBOARD When this is selected, the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect the pitch of keyboard played Voices and Style playback (controlled by the performance in the chord section of the keyboard) — but they do not affect Song playback. SONG When this is selected, the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect only the pitch of Song playback. MASTER When this is selected, the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect the overall pitch of the instrument, except audio playback. You can confirm the setting here by viewing the pop-up window called up via the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons. CVP-701 Reference Manual 11 Editing Voices (Voice Set) The instrument has a Voice Set feature that allows you to create your own Voices by editing some parameters of the existing Voices. Once you’ve created a Voice, you can save it as a User Voice to the USER drive or external devices for future recall. 1 2 2 3 Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ Flutes Voice). Organ Flutes Voices have a different editing method than described here. For instructions on editing the Organ Flutes Voices, see page 17. Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary. Press the [5] (VOICE SET) button to call up the VOICE SET display. Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 4 6 5 4 5 6 Use the TAB [L][R] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. For information on the available parameters in each display, see the “Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays” on page 13. As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) to be edited and edit the Voice by using the [1] – [8] buttons. By pressing the [D] (COMPARE) button, you can compare the sound of the edited Voice with the original (unedited) Voice. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The settings will be lost if you select another Voice or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. 12 CVP-701 Reference Manual Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays The Voice Set parameters are organized into several different displays. The parameters in each display are described separately, below. NOTE The available parameters differ depending on the Voice.  COMMON Page VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice. [2]/ [3] TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the touch sensitivity (velocity sensitivity), or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength. TOUCH SENSE DEPTH TOUCH SENSE OFFSET Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth (with Offset set to 64) Changes to velocity curve according to VelOffset (with Depth set to 64) Actual Velocity for tone generator Actual Velocity for tone generator Offset = 96 (+64) Offset = 127 (+127) Depth = 127 (twice) 127 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – [1] 127 Offset = 64 (normal) Depth = 64 (normal) 64 64 Depends on offset Depth = 32 (half) Offset = 32 (-64) Depth = 0 0 64 127 Received Velocity (Actual KeyOn speed) 0 64 Depends on offset 127 Received Velocity (Actual KeyOn speed) Offset = 0 (-127) DEPTH Determines the velocity sensitivity, or how much the level of the Voice changes in response to your playing strength (velocity). OFFSET Determines the amount by which received velocities are adjusted for the actual velocity effect. [4]/ [5] PART OCTAVE Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves. When the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1–2 parts, the R1/R2 parameter is available; when the edited Voice is used as the LEFT part, the LEFT parameter is available. [6] MONO/POLY Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or polyphonically. [7] PORTAMENTO TIME Sets the portamento time (pitch transition time) when the edited Voice is set to “MONO” above. NOTE The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. CVP-701 Reference Manual 13  CONTROLLER Page 1 CENTER PEDAL 2 LEFT PEDAL These allow you to select the function to be assigned to the center or left pedal. 2 [1] FUNCTION Selects the function to be assigned to the center or left pedal. For details on the pedal functions, see page 88. [2] – [8] RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, etc. Determines whether the assigned function is effective or not for the respective keyboard part. This also determines the depth for the function. For details, see page 88. Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 3 MODULATION When a pedal function is assigned to MODULATION, the pedal can be used to modulate the parameters below as well as the pitch (vibrato). Here, you can set the degree to which the pedal modulates each of the following parameters. [2] FILTER Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter cutoff frequency. For details about the filter, see page 14. [3] AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude (volume). [5] LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the pitch, or the vibrato effect. [6] LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter modulation, or the wah effect. [7] LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude, or the tremolo effect.  SOUND Page FILTER Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking or passing a specific frequency range. The parameters below determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. In addition to making the sound either brighter or mellower, Filter can be used to produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects. [1] BRIGHT (Brightness) Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the filter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound. Volume Cutoff Frequency These frequencies are “passed” by the filter. [2] HARMO. (Harmonic content) Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency (resonance), set in BRIGHT. above (see diagram). Higher values result in a more pronounced effect. Cutoff range Frequency (pitch) Volume Resonance Frequency (pitch) 14 CVP-701 Reference Manual Level Sustain Level ATTACK Key on DECAY RELEASE Time Key off [3] ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played. The lower the value, the quicker the attack. [4] DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The lower the value, the quicker the decay. [5] RELES. (Release) Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. The lower the value, the quicker the decay. VIBRATO Vibrato is a quavering, vibrating sound effect that is produced by regularly modulating the pitch of the Voice. 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – EG The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone. Pitch SPEED DEPTH DELAY Time [6] DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. [7] SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect. [8] DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset.  EFFECT/EQ Page 1 REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/DSP DEPTH/VIB ROTOR [1]/ [2] REVERB DEPTH Adjusts the reverb depth. The setting cannot be changed when a VRM Voice is selected. [3]/ [4] CHORUS DEPTH Adjusts the chorus depth. The setting cannot be changed when a VRM Voice is selected. [5] DSP ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP is on or off. [6] DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP depth. If you want to re-select the DSP type, you can do so in the “2 DSP” menu explained on page 16. [7] VIBE ROTOR This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained on page 16. Determines whether VibeRotor should be set to on or off when selecting the Voice. CVP-701 Reference Manual 15 2 DSP [1] – [4] DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type. Select the desired category first, then a type. [6] VARI. A Variation parameter is provided for each DSP type. By turning this on or off, you can instantly and significantly change the sound of the DSP effect. Here, you can edit the VARI. (Variation) on/off status and the parameter value for each status (in DETAIL below). [5]/ [7] DETAIL Calls up the detailed setting display. Press the [5] button for editing the standard parameter value, and the [7] button for editing the Variation parameter value. In the detailed setting display, select the desired parameter by using the [2] – [4] buttons then adjust the value by using the [5] – [6] buttons. This differs depending on the effect type and cannot be changed. Press the [EXIT] button to close the setting display. 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 3 EQ Determines the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands. For information about EQ, refer to page 84.  HARMONY Page Harmony sets the Right 1 and 2 parts together. Before you set these parameters, make sure the Right 1 part is selected in the Main display. This has the same settings as the display of “Selecting the Harmony/Echo type” page 8 in step 3. Disabling Automatic Selection of Voice Sets (Effects, etc.) Each Voice is linked to its default VOICE SET parameter settings. Usually these settings are automatically called up when a Voice is selected. However, you can also disable this feature by the operation in the relevant display as explained below. For example, if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony effect, set the KEYBOARD HARMONY parameter to OFF (in the display explained below). 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [F] VOICE SETTING → TAB [L][R] VOICE SET FILTER Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a keyboard part. 2 3 3 16 Use the [4] – [8] buttons to enable/disable automatic calling up of the settings (ON or OFF) independently for each parameter group. CVP-701 Reference Manual Editing Organ Flutes Parameters The Organ Flute Voices selected from the [ORGAN FLUTES] button can be edited by adjusting the footage levers, adding the attack sound, applying effects and equalizer, etc. NOTICE After editing, go to the Voice Selection display by pressing the [I] (PRESETS) button and save the setting. The settings will be lost if you select another Voice or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.  FOOTAGE Page Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 2.  VOLUME/ATTACK Page Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 2 Same as the FOOTAGE Page. [1] VOL (Volume) Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume. [2] RESP (Response) Affects both the attack and release (page 15) portion of the sound, increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value, the slower the swell and release. [3] VIB. SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the VIBRATO ON/OFF ([F]/[G] buttons) and VIBRATO DEPTH ([H] button). [4] MODE The MODE control selects one of two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST mode, attack (percussive sound) is applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously; while the first notes are held, any subsequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all notes. [5] – [7] 4', 2 2/3', 2' These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE Voice. The 4', 2-2/3' and 2' controls increase or reduce the volume of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the attack sound volume. [8] LENG (Length) Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar, the longer the decay.  EFFECT/EQ Page Same parameters as in the VOICE SET “EFFECT/EQ” Page explained on page 15. CVP-701 Reference Manual 17 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – Contents Style Playback Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with Your Left Hand. . . . . . . . . . 21 Searching for Suitable Songs for the Current Style (Repertoire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Memorizing an Original One Touch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Confirming the One Touch Setting Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – • Realtime Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 • Step Recording (Inputting events one by one). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 • Style Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 • Editing the Rhythmic Feel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 • Editing Data for Each Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 • Making Style File Format Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Style Playback Settings The instrument has a variety of Style playback functions which can be accessed in the display below. 1 2 18 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [G] STYLE SETTING Use the [1] – [8] and [B]/[C]/[F] buttons for each setting. CVP-701 Reference Manual [B] OTS LINK TIMING This applies to the OTS Link function. This parameter determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] change. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.) REAL TIME One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a MAIN VARIATION button. NEXT BAR One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a MAIN VARIATION button. STOP ACMP When the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is on, [SYNC START] is off, and this parameter is set to the value other than “DISABLED,” you can play chords in the chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped, and still hear the accompaniment chord. In this condition — called “Stop Accompaniment” — any valid chord fingerings are recognized and the chord root/type are shown in the display. Here, you can determine whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the Stop Accompaniment status. 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – [C] DISABLED Disables the Stop Accompaniment feature. When Style playback is stopped, any pressed notes in the chord section of the keyboard will not be recognized as chords. OFF The chord played in the chord section will not sound. STYLE The chord played in the chord section will sound via the Voices for the Pad part and the Bass channel of the selected Style. FIXED The chord played in the chord section will sound via the specified Voice, regardless of the selected Style. NOTE When the selected Style contains MegaVoices, unexpected sounds may result when this is set to “STYLE.” NOTE When you record a song, the chord detected by playing the Stop Accompaniment can be recorded regardless of the setting here. Please note that both the Voice that is sounded and the chord data will be recorded when set to “STYLE,” and only the chord data will be recorded when set to “OFF” or “FIXED.” NOTE When this is set to “DISABLED,” chords are not recognized while the Style is stopped. This is why Keyboard Harmony (page 8) is not applied even if you play a chord in the chord section of the keyboard while the Style is stopped. [F] ACMP ON/OFF DEFAULT Determines whether the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is on or off when the power is turned on. [1]/ [2] DYNAMICS CONTROL This determines how the Style playback volume changes depending on the playing strength. • WIDE ........... The volume changes over a wide range. • MEDIUM..... The volume changes over a medium range. • NARROW .... The volume changes over a narrow range. • OFF .............. The volume is kept the same regardless of playing strength. CVP-701 Reference Manual 19 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – [3]/ [4] SYNCHRO STOP WINDOW This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop function is automatically cancelled. When the [SYNC STOP] button is turned on and this is set to a value other than “OFF,” the Synchro Stop function is automatically cancelled if you hold a chord for longer than the time set here. This conveniently resets Style playback control to normal, letting you release the keys and still have the Style play. In other words, if you release the keys sooner than the time set here, the Synchro Stop function works. [5]/ [6] SECTION SET Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different Styles (when Style playback is stopped). When set to “OFF” and Style playback is stopped, the active section is maintained even if the different Style is selected. When any of the MAIN A – D sections is not included in the Style data, the nearest section is automatically selected. For example, when MAIN D is not contained in the selected Style, MAIN C will be called up. [7] TEMPO This determines whether the tempo changes or not when you change Styles. If you want to avoid changing the tempo when selecting another Style, select LOCK or HOLD. LOCK The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained. HOLD The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained while Style is played back and another Style is selected. While Style playback is stopped and another Style is selected, the tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected Style. RESET The tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected Style. [8] PART ON/OFF This determines whether the on/off status of the Style Channels (Parts) changes or not when you change Styles. If you want to avoid changing the Style Channel On/Off status when selecting another Style, select LOCK or HOLD. LOCK The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained. HOLD The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained while Style is played back and another Style is selected. While Style playback is stopped and another Style is selected, all Style Channels are set to On. RESET All Style Channels are set to On. 20 CVP-701 Reference Manual Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with Your Left Hand By changing the Chord Detection area from the left-hand section to the right-hand section, you can play the bass line with your left hand while using your right hand to control Style playback. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB [L][R] SPLIT POINT 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 3 2 Split Point (STYLE) LEFT Voice section (LOWER section) Split Point (LEFT) RIGHT 1, 2 Voices section (UPPER section) + Chord Section 2 Set the CHORD DETECTION AREA value to “UPPER” with the [1]/[2] buttons. 3 Press the [E] button to turn the MANUAL BASS function on. With this setting, the whole right-hand (UPPER) section works as the Chord section as well as melody performance. In this condition, note the following points: • In the right-hand (UPPER) section, you can specify the chord type as you play the melody. • The Bass Part Voice of the current Style is assigned to the Keyboard LEFT part. This is referred to as the Manual Bass function, which can be turned off or on via the [E] button. • Chord Fingering is set to a special type (“FINGERED*”) automatically, in which you should press three or more notes simultaneously for specifying the chord. Pressing two or fewer notes does not change the chord type. • Split Point (STYLE) is unavailable. CVP-701 Reference Manual 21 Searching for Suitable Songs for the Current Style (Repertoire) You can search for music pieces and songs that are most suitable for playing with the current Style by using the Repertoire function. You can automatically call up appropriate settings such as Voice, effect and pedal by selecting the desired music piece. Before using the Repertoire function, you need to import Music Finder records (see instructions described in the Owner's Manual, chapter 8). NOTE The settings shown here are Music Finder Records. You can choose additional settings by using the Music Finder feature. 1 2 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 3 Select the desired Style from the Style Selection display. Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary. Press the [4] (REPERTOIRE) button. Various appropriate panel settings matching the selected Style will be shown in the display. 3 4 4 Use the [2] – [3] buttons to select the desired panel setting. NOTE Depending on the particular selected Style, there may not be any panel settings in the Repertoire function. 22 CVP-701 Reference Manual Memorizing an Original One Touch Setting While the panel settings appropriate for each preset Style are pre-programmed as One Touch Settings, you can also register your favorite settings to create original One Touch Settings. Because the One Touch Setting data is included in a Style, the Save operation will be done as a Style on the Style Selection display. 1 Select the desired Style to correspond to your One Touch Setting. 2 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, effects, and so on) as desired. 3 Press the [MEMORY] button in the REGISTRATION MEMORY section. 4 5 3 4 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 3 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons. A message appears in the display prompting you to save the panel settings. Press [G] (YES) button to call up the Style Selection display and save the panel settings as a Style file. NOTICE The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without executing the Save operation. Confirming the One Touch Setting Contents You can check the information of the One Touch Setting [1] – [4] assigned to currently selected Style. 1 In the Style Selection display, call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary, then press the [6] (OTS INFO) button to call up the Information display. 2 1 NOTE You can also call up the Information display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button then pressing one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons. 2 Press the [F] (CLOSE) button to close the Information display. CVP-701 Reference Manual 23 Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) Styles are made up of fifteen different sections (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) and each section has eight separate channels. With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately recording the channels, or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles. Sections Channels 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – You can use one of the three different methods described below to create a Style. The created Style can also be edited. • Realtime Recording This method lets you record the Style by simply playing the keyboard. See page 25. • Step Recording This method lets you to enter each note individually. See page 28. • Style Assembly This method lets you create a composite Style by combining various patterns from the internal preset Styles or from Styles you have already created. See page 28. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [A] STYLE CREATOR 1 2 NOTE The Style files created on this instrument can only be played back on instruments which are compatible with SFF GE. There are several Pages (tabs) in the Style Creator display. 24 • BASIC Creates the basic settings of the Style. You can also record your performance in realtime to create a new Style (Realtime Recording). See page 25. • ASSEMBLY Mixes the various parts (channels) from preset Styles or already created Styles to create a new Style. See page 28. • GROOVE Changes the rhythmic feel of your created Style. See page 30. • CHANNEL Edits data for each channel — quantizing, changing velocity, etc. See page 32. • PARAMETER Changes the settings related for Style File Format. See page 33. • EDIT Lets you enter notes one by one to create an original Style (Step Recording). See page 28. CVP-701 Reference Manual Realtime Recording In the BASIC Page, you can create a single Style by recording the individual channels one-by-one, using realtime recording. Realtime Recording Characteristics — Loop Recording and Overdub Recording • Loop Recording Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a “loop,” and Style recording is also done using loops. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record while hearing previously recorded material. • Overdub Recording This method records new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the original data. In Style recording, the recorded data is not deleted, except when using functions such as Rhythm Clear (page 27) and Delete (page 26). For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two measures are repeated many times. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material. When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style, overdub recording is applied only to the rhythm channels. For all other channels (except rhythm), you need to delete the original data before recording. 2 3 4 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 1 3 When you want to create a Style based on an existing Style, select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing before calling up the Style Creator display. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [A] STYLE CREATOR The BASIC Page is shown. If you want to create a new Style from scratch, press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button to delete the data of all channels. Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new Style. First close the RECORD display by pressing the [EXIT] button. Then use the [3]/[4] buttons to select the section to be recorded. 5-2 4 5-1 NOTE To call up the RECORD display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button. NOTE You can specify the sections to be recorded by using the Section buttons on the panel. Refer to step 3 on page 28. NOTE You cannot select INTRO 4 and ENDING 4 sections directly via panel operations. CVP-701 Reference Manual 25 5 6 Use the [5]/[6] buttons to determine the length (number of measures) of the selected section, then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the specified length. Specify the channel to be recorded by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate numbered button, [1] – [8]. To cancel the selection, press the corresponding [1] – [8] button again. 6 3 7 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 7 Call up the Voice Selection display by using the [1] – [8] buttons and select the desired Voice for the corresponding recording channels. Press the [EXIT] button to close the Voice Selection display. Recordable Voices • RHY1 channel Any except your original Organ Flute and Super Articulation Voices are recordable. • RHY2 channel Only drum/SFX kits are recordable. • BASS–PHR2 channels Any except your original Organ Flute, drum/SFX kits and Super Articulation Voices are recordable. NOTE Preset Organ Flute Voices can be recorded to the RHY1 and BASS–PHR2 channels. 8 If necessary, delete a channel by simultaneously holding down the [J] (DELETE) button and pressing the appropriate numbered button, [1] – [8]. You can cancel the deletion by pressing the same numbered button again before releasing your finger from the [J] button. NOTE When recording channels BASS–PHR2 based on an existing Style, you have to delete the original data before recording. 26 CVP-701 Reference Manual 9 Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button. Playback of the specified section starts. Since the accompaniment pattern plays back repeatedly in a loop, you can record individual sounds one by one, listening to the previous sounds as they play. For information on recording to channels other than the rhythm channels (RHY1, 2), refer to the section “Rules when recording non-rhythm channels” below. NOTE You can turn off the desired channels by pressing the corresponding [1] – [8] buttons. Deleting recorded notes in the rhythm channel 3 10 To continue recording with another channel, repeat steps 6 – 9. 11 Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button. 12 Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display. 13 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – When you are recording the rhythm channel (RHY1 or RHY2), you can delete a specific instrument sound by simultaneously holding down the [E] (RHY CLEAR) button and pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Rules when recording non-rhythm channels • Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE channels (i.e., C, D, E, G, A, and B). • Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD channels (i.e., C, E, G, and B). C R C C R C C = Chord note C, R = Recommended note Using the data recorded here, the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your performance. The chord which forms the basis for this note conversion is called the Source Chord, and is set by default to CM7 (as in the example illustration above). You can change the Source Chord (its root and type) from the PARAMETER display on page 34. Keep in mind that when you change the Source Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 34. NOTE For the INTRO and ENDING sections, any desired chord or chord progression can be used. CVP-701 Reference Manual 27 Step Recording (Inputting events one by one) In the EDIT Page, you can record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording (page 50) with the exception of the points listed below: • In the Song Creator, the End Mark position can be changed freely; in the Style Creator, it cannot be changed. This is because the length of the Style is automatically fixed, depending on the selected section. For example, if you create a Style based on a section of four measures length, the End Mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display. • Recording channels can be changed in the Song Creator 1-16 tab display; however, they cannot be changed in the Style Creator. Select the recording channel in the BASIC tab display. • In the Style Creator, the channel data can be entered and System Exclusive data can be edited (delete, copy, or move). You can switch between the two by pressing the [F] button. However, Chord, Lyrics, and System Exclusive data cannot be entered. 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – For instructions on Step Recording, refer to pages 50 – 53. For information on the EDIT display (Event List display), refer to page 63. Style Assembly Style Assembly allows you to create a single Style by mixing the various patterns (channels) from existing internal Styles. 1 2 3 Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing before calling up the Style Creator display. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [A] STYLE CREATOR → TAB [L][R] ASSEMBLY Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new Style. First call up the SECTION Selection display by pressing one of the Section buttons (INTRO, MAIN, ENDING, etc.) on the panel. Then change the section as desired by using the [6]/[7] buttons and actually enter the selection by pressing the [8] (OK) button. NOTE You cannot select INTRO 4 and ENDING 4 sections directly via panel operations. 28 CVP-701 Reference Manual 4 Select the channel for which you wish to replace the pattern by using the [A] – [D] and [F] – [I] buttons. Call up the Style Selection display by pressing the same button again. Select the Style containing the pattern you want to replace in the Style Selection display. To return to the previous screen, press the [EXIT] button after selecting the Style. 4 [A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons 5 5 6 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 3 6 Select the desired section of the newly imported Style (chosen in step 4) by using the [2]/[3] (SECTION) buttons. Select the desired channel for the section (chosen in step 5) by using the [4]/ [5] (CHANNEL) buttons. Repeat steps 4 – 6 above to replace the patterns of other channels. Playing the Style During Style Assembly While you are assembling a Style, you can play back the Style (to check the sound of your edits) and conveniently select the method of playback. Use the [6]/[7] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in the Style Assembly display to select the playback method. • SOLO Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. Any channels set to ON in the RECORD display on the BASIC Page are played back simultaneously. • ON Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. Any channels set to other than OFF in the RECORD display on the BASIC Page are played back simultaneously. • OFF Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. 7 Press the [J] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. CVP-701 Reference Manual 29 Editing the Rhythmic Feel 1 3 2 1 3 1 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – In the GROOVE Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu, then edit the data by using the [1] – [8] buttons. 1 GROOVE This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the Style. The Groove settings are applied to all channels of the selected Style. 30 [1]/ [2] ORIGINAL BEAT Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets. [3]/ [4] BEAT CONVERTER Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting. [5]/ [6] SWING Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat”, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced. [7]/ [8] FINE Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat — but not including the first beat — will be played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect. CVP-701 Reference Manual 2 DYNAMICS This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in the Style playback. The Dynamics settings can be applied individually to each channel or globally to all channels of the selected Style. 3 CHANNEL Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied. [3]/ [4] ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied — in other words, which notes in the part(s) are emphasized with the Dynamics settings. [6] STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect. [7] EXPAND/ COMP. Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% compress it. [8] BOOST/CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it. 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 2 [1]/ [2] Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display. After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the Groove or Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. CVP-701 Reference Manual 31 Editing Data for Each Channel 1 5 4 2 3 1 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – In the CHANNEL Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu. 1 QUANTIZE Same as in the Song Creator (page 61), with the exception of the two additional available parameters below. Eighth notes with swing Sixteenth notes with swing 2 VELOCITY CHANGE Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel, according to the percentage specified here. 3 BAR COPY This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specified channel. [4] TOP [5] LAST [6] DEST Specifies the first (TOP) and last (LAST) measures in the region to be copied. Specifies the first measure of the destination location, to which the data is to be copied. 4 BAR CLEAR This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. 5 REMOVE EVENT This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. 2 3 4 32 Use the [1]/[2] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited. The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display. Use the [4] – [8] buttons to edit the data. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display. After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the results of the edit. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. CVP-701 Reference Manual Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Making Style File Format Settings The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into a single unified format. By using the Style Creator, you can take advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create your own Styles. The chart shown below indicates the process by which the Style is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm track.) These parameters can be set via the Style Creator feature, in the PARAMETER Page. 3 Source Pattern settings — SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/CHORD (page 34) The Style data is appropriately converted depending on chord changes you make during your performance. You can create the “Source Pattern” with the Style Creator, which determines how the played chord will be converted. Here the “Source Chord” (page 34) can be set, allowing you to record accompaniment channels. Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 5 Chord changes via the chord section of the keyboard. Note Transposition settings — NTR and NTT (page 35) This parameter group features two parameters that determine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to be converted in response to chord changes. Other settings — HIGH KEY, NOTE LIMIT and RTR (page 37) Using the parameters of this group, you can fine-tune how Style playback responds to the chords you play. For example, the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the Voices of the Style sound as realistic as possible by shifting the pitch to an authentic range — ensuring that no notes sound outside the natural range of the actual instrument (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds). Output This instrument’s Styles are compatible with SFF GE — an enhanced format of the original SFF with especially rich, expressive guitar parts. NOTE The Style files created on this instrument can only be played back on instruments which are compatible with SFF GE. CVP-701 Reference Manual 33 1 In the PARAMETER Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu. For details of the edit menu, see page 34. 1 4 2 3 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 3 4 3 Use the [1]/[2] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited. The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display. Use the [3] – [8] buttons to edit the data. For details on editable parameters, see pages 34 – 37. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. 1 SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/CHORD These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). When you change Source Root/Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change, depending on the newly selected chord type. When the Source Root is C: C6 CMaj CM 7 ♯ 11 CM 7 CM 7 (9) Cadd 9 C 6 (9) C C R C C R C R C C C R Cm Caug R C R Cm 7 (11) C R C C C C C R C 7 ♭5 C C C C C C C R C C C C C R C C R C R C C R R C C R C C C C 1+5 C C C R C C 7 sus4 C C R C C C C C C 7 ( ♯ 9) C 7 ( ♭ 13) C C C C C C R C C C C R C R C C R C 7 ( ♭ 9) C C C C R C C C Cm 7 (9) C7 C C R C R C Cmadd 9 C C 7 (13) C R C R Cdim 7 C C C R C C 1+8 C 7 aug R C C C C R C Cdim C 7 ♯ 11 C CM 7 aug C R C R C C 7 (9) C R C C C C C C Cm 7 ♭ 5 C R C C CmM 7 (9) R C C R C Cm 7 C C R C R C C R C CmM 7 C C R C Cm 6 C R C R C C R C C C C C R C C R C C C Csus 2 Csus 4 R C C C R C C C C C R C C C C R C R C = Chord notes C, R = Recommended notes NOTE When NTR is set to “Root Fixed,” NTT is set to “Bypass” and NTT BASS is set to “OFF,” the “Source Root” and “Source Chord” parameters are changed to “Play Root” and “Play Chord,” respectively. In this case, you can change chords and hear the resulting sound for all channels. NOTE SOURCE ROOT/CHORD is not applied when NTR is set to GUITAR. 34 CVP-701 Reference Manual 2 NTR/NTT [3]/ [4] NTR (Note Transposition Rule) Determines the relative position of the root note in the chord, when converted from the Source Pattern in response to chord changes. Refer to the list below. [5] – [7] NTT (Note Transposition Table) Sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Refer to the list below. [8] NTT BASS ON/ OFF The channel for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note, when the on-bass chord is recognized by the instrument. When NTR is set to GUITAR and this parameter is set to ON, only notes assigned to bass will be played back by the bass root note. NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ROOT FIXED GUITAR When the root note is transposed, the interval between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain melody lines. The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts. 3 When playing a C major chord. When playing an F major chord. When playing a C major chord. When playing an F major chord. Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – ROOT TRANS (Root Transpose) This is exclusively for transposing guitar accompaniment. Notes are transposed to approximate the chords played with natural guitar fingering. NTT (Note Transposition Table) When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS or ROOT FIXED BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED, the transposition table used does not do any note conversion. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS, the table used only converts the notes by maintaining the pitch relationship between notes. MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. CHORD Suitable for chordal parts transposition. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. MELODIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for melody channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings. MELODIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th intervals of the Source Pattern. CVP-701 Reference Manual 35 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – HARMONIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings. HARMONIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. NATURAL MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third, sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third, flatted sixth and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings. NATURAL MINOR 5th In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings. DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. When NTR is set to GUITAR 36 ALL-PURPOSE This table covers both strummed- and arpeggio-played sound. STROKE Suitable for strumming sounds of the guitar. Some notes may sound as if they are muted—this is the normal condition when chords are played on guitar by strumming. ARPEGGIO Suitable for arpeggio-played sound of the guitar. Using this table, four notes arpeggio sounds most beautiful. CVP-701 Reference Manual 3 HIGH KEY / NOTE LIMIT [4]/ [5] HIGH KEY This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the next lowest octave. This setting is effective only when the NTR parameter (page 35) is set to “Root Trans.” Example — When the highest key is F NOTE LIMIT LOW [7] NOTE LIMIT HIGH CM Notes played C3-E3-G3 C♯ M ♯ C 3-F3-G ♯ 3 FM F3-A3-C4 F♯ M ♯ F 2-A ♯ 2-C ♯ 3 These set the note range (highest and lowest notes) for Voices recorded to the Style channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the Voices sound as realistic as possible — in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds). 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – [6] Root changes Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4 Root changes CM Notes played E3-G3-C4 C♯ M F3-G ♯ 3-C ♯ 4 FM F3-A3-C4 High Limit Low Limit 4 RTR (Retrigger Rule) These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes. STOP The notes stop sounding. PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord. PITCH SHIFT TO ROOT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same. RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord. RETRIGGER TO ROOT The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same. CVP-701 Reference Manual 37 Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – Contents Editing Music Notation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat settings, Channel settings, Guide Function) . . .41 • Keyboard Practice Using the Guide Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 • Playing Backing Parts with the Performance Assistant Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 4 Editing Music Notation Settings Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – To view the music notation of the selected Song, press the [SCORE] button. You can change the notation display as desired to suit your personal preferences. The settings here are maintained even when the power is turned off. NOTE You can save the setting here as a part of a Song by accessing [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB[L][R] SETUP. See page 59. 38 [1] LEFT ON/ OFF Enables/disables display of the left-hand key range. Depending on other settings, this parameter may be unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is the case, go to the detailed setting display (on page 39) and set the LEFT CH. parameter to any channel except “AUTO.” Or, go to the display [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING → TAB [L][R] GUIDE/ CHANNEL and set the TRACK 2 parameter to any channel except “OFF” (page 41). RIGHT (next parameter) and LEFT cannot be turned off at the same time. [2] RIGHT ON/ OFF Enables/disables display of the right-hand key range. RIGHT and LEFT (above) cannot be turned off at the same time. [3] CHORD ON/OFF Enables/disables display of the chords. If the selected Song does not contain chord data, chords are not displayed. CVP-701 Reference Manual [4] LYRICS ON/OFF Enables/disables display of the lyrics. If the selected Song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. When the Song contains Pedal events, pressing these buttons can display the Pedal events, instead of displaying Lyrics. [5] NOTE ON/ OFF Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch). The note name is indicated at the left of the note. When the space between the notes is too small, the indication may be moved to the top left of the note. When the Song contains Fingering events, pressing these buttons can display the fingering, instead of displaying note names. [6] COLOR NOTE When this is set to ON, the notes in the display are color-coded (C: red, D: yellow, E: green, F: orange, G: blue, A: purple, and B: gray). [7] SIZE Determines the display resolution (or zoom level) of the notation. [8] SET UP See below. Pressing the [8] (SET UP) button calls up the detailed setting display. You can set the view type by using the [1] – [6] buttons, then press the [8] (OK) button. LEFT CH [2] RIGHT CH Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – [1] 4 Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/righthand part. This setting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected. AUTO The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically — setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is specified in [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING → TAB [L][R] GUIDE/CHANNEL (page 41). 1 – 16 Assigns the specified MIDI channel (1 – 16) to the respective left- or right-hand parts. OFF (LEFT CH only) No channel assignment. This disables display of the left-hand key range. [3]/ [4] KEY SIGNATURE This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a Song, at the stopped position. This setting is useful for Songs you've recorded with key changes, so the key signature changes are properly reflected in the notation. [5] QUANTIZE This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure to select the smallest note value used in the Song. CVP-701 Reference Manual 39 [6] NOTE NAME Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation from among the following three types. The settings here are available when the NOTE ON/OFF parameter above is set to ON. A, B, C Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B). Fixed DO Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language. Movable DO Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of “Sol” would be indicated as “Do.” As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language. 4 Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, channels 9-16 in the Song data are replaced with Style channels – allowing you to play the accompaniment parts of the Song yourself. Try playing chords along with the Song playback as shown in the instructions below. When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, we recommend that you use the Preset Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder. 1 Select a Song. 2 Select a Style. 3 4 5 6 Press the STYLE [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment function. Press the STYLE [SYNC START] button to enable standby — letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing. While holding down the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to enable synchronized start for the Song. Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button or play chords with your left hand. The Song and Style starts playing. When you play chords, pressing the [SCORE] button and turning CHORD on (page 38) allows you to see the chord information. NOTE When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, the tempo value set in the Song is automatically used. When Song playback is stopped, the Style playback is also stopped at the same time. 40 CVP-701 Reference Manual Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat settings, Channel settings, Guide Function) The instrument has a variety of Song playback functions — Repeat playback, various Guide settings, etc. — which can be accessed in the display below. 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING Select the desired page, GUIDE/CHANNEL or OTHERS, by using the TAB [L][R] buttons. Detailed settings for playback, such as Repeat mode, can be set in the OTHERS page of the Song Setting display. 4 Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – 1  GUIDE/CHANNEL Page [A]/[B] GUIDE MODE See page 43. [C] GUIDE LAMP [D] GUIDE LAMP TIMING [I] PHRASE MARK REPEAT Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed part of some Song data, which specifies a certain location (set of measures) in the Song. When this is on, the section corresponding to the specified Phrase Mark number is repeatedly played back. [2]/ [3] TRACK 2 These parameters determine which MIDI channel in the Song data is assigned to the Left- or Right-hand part of the Guide function and the Song Score function. [4]/ [5] TRACK 1 [6]/ [7] AUTO CH SET When set to “ON,” this automatically sets the proper MIDI channels for the Right- and Left hand parts pre-programmed in the commercially available Song data. Normally, this should be set to “ON.” CVP-701 Reference Manual 41  OTHERS Page [G] REPEAT MODE Determines the method of repeat playback. OFF Plays through the selected Song, then stops. SINGLE Plays through the selected Song repeatedly. ALL Continues playback through all the Songs in the specified folder repeatedly. RANDOM Continues playback at random through all the Songs in the specified folder repeatedly. NOTE The preset Songs in the “Follow Lights” folder contain the Guide settings. These Songs are inap- propriate for use with ALL or RANDOM repeat. 4 [H] CHORD DETECTION PRIORITY Determines the priority of the chords for accompaniment, either the ones contained in the MIDI Song being played back or the chords you play in the chord section of the keyboard. Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – • MIDI SONG: Gives priority to the chords contained in the MIDI Song. • KEYBOARD: Gives priority to the chords you play in the chord section of the keyboard. Set this if you want to practice playing chords with MIDI Song playback. Once you play in the chord section during MIDI Song playback, the instrument ignores the chords contained in the MIDI Song until the playback ends. [I] FAST FORWARD TYPE Determines the fast forward type of when pressing [FF] button during MIDI Song playback. • Jump: Pressing [FF] button once instantly sets the playback position to the next measure without sounding. Holding [FF] button scrolls forward continuously. • Scrub: Pressing and holding [FF] button plays and sounds the MIDI Song at high speed. In the following cases, fast forwarding through a MIDI Song functions as the Jump type even if Scrub is selected. • When MIDI Clock is set to External • When the MIDI Song is fast-forwarded by Phrase marks NOTE Pressing [FF] button during while a MIDI Song is stopped functions as the Jump type. [2]/ [3] LYRICS LANGUAGE Determines the language of the displayed lyrics. AUTO When the language is specified in the Song data, the lyrics are displayed accordingly. When the language is not specified in the Song data, the lyrics language is regarded as INTERNATIONAL below. INTERNATIONAL Handles the displayed lyrics as a western language. JAPANESE Handles the displayed lyrics as Japanese. 42 CVP-701 Reference Manual [4]/ [5] QUICK START On some commercially available Song data, certain settings related to the Song (such as Voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the first measure, before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the instrument reads all initial non-note data of the Song at the highest possible speed, then automatically switches to the appropriate tempo at the first note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a minimum pause for reading of data. [6]/ [7] P.A.T. See page 45. Keyboard Practice Using the Guide Function The keyboard guide lamps indicate the notes (location and timing) for you to play. 2 3 4 Select the desired Song for practicing the keyboard or singing. Call up the setting display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING → TAB [L][R] GUIDE/CHANNEL Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – 1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type. Guide menu for keyboard practice • Follow Lights With this function, the keyboard guide lamps indicate which notes you should play. Song playback pauses and waits for you to play. When you play the correct notes, Song playback continues. • Any Key With this function, you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key (any key is OK) in time with the rhythm. Song playback pauses and waits for you to play any key. Simply play a key on the keyboard in time with the music and Song playback continues. • Your Tempo The same as Follow Lights, except that Song playback matches the speed at which you play. Guide menu for singing • Karao-Key This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one finger, while you sing along. This is useful for singing to your own performance. Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. Simply play a key on the keyboard (any key is fine) and Song playback continues. CVP-701 Reference Manual 43 4 Turn the [GUIDE] button on. 5 Call up the Score display by pressing the [SCORE] button. 6 Press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Practice playing the keyboard or singing, along with the Guide type selected in step 3. NOTE The guide lamps light according to Song channels recorded to Track 1 and 2 and the chord data in the Song (when such data is included). If the guide lamps do not light as intended, you may need to assign the appropriate right- and left-hand channels to Track 1 and 2 respectively (page 41). 7 4 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop playback. Determining the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light (GUIDE LAMP TIMING) Press the [D] button in the SONG SETTING display in step 3 to select the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light. Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – • JUST The guide lamps light in time with the music, at the same timing you should play. • NEXT The guide lamps light slightly ahead of the music, indicating the notes you should play next. The guide lamps flash if you fail to play the keys with the correct timing. NOTE If you want to turn the guide lamps off, press the [C] (GUIDE LAMP) button in the SONG SETTING display (in step 3 as described above). NOTE You can save the Guide settings as a part of the Song data (page 59). For Songs to which the Guide settings have been saved, the Guide function will be automatically turned on and the related settings will be recalled when the Song is selected. 44 CVP-701 Reference Manual Playing Backing Parts with the Performance Assistant Technology This feature lets you play your own backing parts on the keyboard along with Song playback, and have them sound perfectly appropriate (even though you might be playing wrong notes). 2 3 4 5 Select a Song containing chord data. The Performance Assistant Technology applies only to Songs containing chord data. To confirm whether the selected Song contains chord data or not, return to the Main display, then start playback. If the current Song contains chord data, the Main display shows the current chord type. After stopping playback, go to the next step. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING → TAB [L][R] OTHERS Press the [6]/[7] button to turn the P.A.T. (Performance Assistant Technology) on. 4 Press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the keyboard. Along with Song playback, try playing a bass line in the left hand area while playing various phrases or chords in the right hand area. Even if you do not know what notes should be played, don’t worry and play any keys as desired! Only the harmonically “correct” notes matching the current chord are sounded, regardless of the notes you actually play. Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – 1 Current chord 6 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop playback. 7 Press the [6]/[7] button to turn the P.A.T. off. NOTE Selecting another Song may reset P.A.T. to OFF. CVP-701 Reference Manual 45 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – Contents Recording Style Playback First, Then Melodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 • Recording a Style Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 • Recording a Melody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 • Saving the Recorded Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 • Recording Melodies (Step Recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 • Recording Chords (Step Recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 • Re-recording a Specific Section — Punch In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 • Changing the Setup Parameters Recorded to the Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 • Editing Channel Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 • Editing Chord Events, Notes, System Exclusive Events and Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – Recording Style Playback First, Then Melodies Here, you will learn how to record a style to channels 9 – 16 first and then a melody to channel 1 in a realtime recording. The instructions hereafter assume the following panel settings as an example. Before starting recording, make the panel settings as follows; • Turn the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT1] button on, and then select the desired voice of the RIGHT1 part. • Turn the [LEFT] and [RIGHT2] parts off. • Select the desired Style. • Set the Fingering Type to “MULTI FINGER” (default setting): [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB [L][R] CHORD FINGERING Recording a Style Performance 1 46 Press the SONG CONTROL [REC] and SONG CONTROL [STOP] buttons simultaneously. A blank Song for recording is automatically set. CVP-701 Reference Manual 2 Specify the target channel and part for recording. 2-1 While holding down the SONG CONTROL [REC] button, press the [1] – [8] buttons to specify the desired channels (9 – 16) for recording. As the default setting, Style parts (Rythm1-Phrase 2) are assigned to channels 9 – 16 as illustrated on page 49. You can change the parts to be recorded by performing step 2-2. 2-2 2-1 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 2-2 Select the desired part which will be recorded to the channel specified in step 2-1 by using the [C]/[D] buttons. NOTE To cancel the recording, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button. 3 Press the STYLE [SYNC START] button, then play the style by specifying the chords in the chord section. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play the Style. You can also start recording by pressing SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Perform as desired, playing the Style by changing chords and/ or sections. Chord section Split Point (F ♯ 2 as default) NOTE Make sure that the STYLE [ACMP ON/OFF] button is turned on. 4 5 After you finish your performance, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop recording. To hear the recorded performance, press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. This finishes recording of the Style. Now, let’s record a melody to channel 1. CVP-701 Reference Manual 47 Recording a Melody 6 Specify the target channel and part for recording. 6-1 While holding down the SONG CONTROL [REC] button, press the [1] button to specify channel 1 for recording. 6-2 Select “RIGHT1” by using the [C]/[D] buttons. NOTICE Previously recorded data will be overwritten if you set channels which have recorded data to “REC.” NOTE To cancel the recording, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button. 7 Play a melody. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard, or when you press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. You can play a melody while listening to the already recorded Style performance. 5 When recording another channel, you can turn already recorded channels on or off in the display. Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 8 After you finish your performance, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop recording. 9 To hear the recorded performance, press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. This finishes recording of the Style and the melody. Now, let’s save the recorded performance as a file (below). Saving the Recorded Performance 10 Save the recorded performance as a file. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display. The recorded performance will be saved as a file in the Song Selection display. For the following instructions, see “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The recorded Song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation. 48 CVP-701 Reference Manual Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) The Owner’s Manual covers how to create an original Song by recording your keyboard performance (called “Realtime Recording”). This Reference Manual shows how to create an original Song by entering notes one by one (called “Step Recording”) and how to improve an already created Song by editing the detailed parameters.  Realtime Recording and Step Recording When creating a Song, these two Recording methods are available. With Realtime Recording, this instrument records the performance data as it is played. With Step Recording, you can compose your performance by “writing” it down one event at a time. This chapter primarily covers the instructions for Step Recording.  MIDI Song Data Structure A MIDI Song consists of 16 MIDI channels. You can create data of a MIDI Song by recording your performance to a specific channel or channels in realtime, or by executing Step Recording. Recording Part (Default settings) Channel 1 Right 1 Channel 2 Left Keyboard Performance Channel 3 Right 2 • Realtime Recording: Channel 4 — Channel 5 — Channel 6 — Channel 7 — Channel 8 — Channel 9 Rhythm 1 Channel 10 Rhythm 2 Channel 11 Bass Style Playback Channel 12 Chord 1 • Realtime Recording: Channel 13 Chord 2 Channel 14 Pad Channel 15 Phrase 1 Channel 16 Phrase 2 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – Song By default, your keyboard performance will be recorded to MIDI channels 1 – 3. You can also record additional performances to channels 4 – 8. • Step Recording: Without specifying the keyboard part, you can input melodies or notes one by one to the desired channel. By default, Style playback will be recorded to MIDI channels 9 – 16. • Step Recording: After inputting the Chord change/Section change events, touch [Expand] to actually record the note data to MIDI channels 9 – 16. System Exclusive Lyrics CVP-701 Reference Manual 49  Song Creator Display Structure The Song Creator can be called up via [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR. 1 2 There are several Pages (tabs) in the Song Creator display. • REC MODE For re-recording the Song. See page 57. 5 • SETUP For selecting the panel setups to be recorded to the top position of the Song. See page 59. • CHANNEL For editing the Channel events. See page 60. • CHORD For recording the Chords and Sections with timing (page 54) or editing them (page 64). • 1-16 For recording the melodies (Step Recording; see below) or editing them (page 64). • SYS/EX. For editing the System Exclusive events (tempo, time signature, etc.). See page 64. • LYRICS For inputting/editing the Song name and lyrics. See page 65. Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – Recording Melodies (Step Recording) 1 Press the SONG CONTROL [REC] and SONG CONTROL [STOP] buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. NOTE Selecting a blank Song initializes the panel settings. 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB [L][R] 1-16 3 4 50 3 Press the [F] button to select the channel for recording. 4 Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display. CVP-701 Reference Manual Start Step Recording by using the [A] – [J] buttons and [1] – [8] buttons, as well as the keyboard. Refer to the example on page 52 for specific instructions. When a note is input, the location (bar: beat: clock), note name, velocity and length are shown as a list. [A]/[B]/[C] Moves the cursor in the list. [G] Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered. The velocity value can be specified within a range from 1 to 127. The higher the velocity value, the louder the sound becomes. 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 5 Kbd.Vel: Actual resulting velocity fff: 127 ff: 111 f: 95 mf: 79 mp: 63 p: 47 pp: 31 ppp:15 [H] Determines the gate time (note length) of the note to be entered. Normal: 80% Tenuto: 99% Staccato: 40% Staccatissimo: 20% Manual: The gate time can be set to any desired percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. [I] Determines the note type to be entered: normal, dotted or triplet. [J] DELETE Deletes the selected data. [1] BAR Sets the position of the note to be entered. [2] BEAT [3] CLK [4] – [8] Determines the note length to be entered: whole-note, half-note, quarter-note, eighth-note or sixteenth-note. CVP-701 Reference Manual 51 Example of Step Recording — Melodies 1 2 3 4 * The numbers shown in the illustration correspond to the following operation step numbers. In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the operation. Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Recording display. NOTE Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated from the recorded MIDI data, it may not appear exactly the same as shown here. NOTE The illustration given here is just a sample for entering. Non-note musical performance symbols will not be shown in the Score display, even if you've entered them. 1 5 Enter the first and second notes with a slur. Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 Press the [G] button to select “f.” Press the [H] button to select “Ten.” (Tenuto). Press the [I] button to select the dotted note type. Select the dotted quarter-note by using the [6] buttons. Play the C3 key. The first note is entered. 1-6 Press the [I] button to select the “normal” note type. 1-7 Press the [7] button to select the eighth-note length. 1-8 Play the D3 key. The second note is entered. 2 Enter the next notes and apply staccato. 2-1 Press the [H] button to select “Sta.” (Staccato). There are two Staccato settings; choose the “40%” setting. 2-2 Press the [6] button to select the quarter-note length. 2-3 Play the keys E3 and F3 in order. The first measure has been completed. 3 52 To enter a quarter-note rest, press the [6] button again. To enter the rest, use the [4] – [8] buttons. (Press the button once to select the rest value, and once again to actually enter it.) A rest having the specified note length will be entered. CVP-701 Reference Manual 4 Enter the next notes and apply a tie. 4-1 Press the [G] button to select “mP.” 4-2 Press the [H] button to select “Nrm.” (Normal). 4-3 While holding G3 key on the keyboard, press the [6] button. Do not release the G3 key yet. Keep holding it while executing the following steps. 4-4 While holding the G3 key, press the C4 key. Do not release the G3 and C4 keys yet. Keep holding the notes while executing the following step. 4-5 While holding the keys G3 and C4, press the [5] button. After pressing the button, release the keys. 6 7 5 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top of the Song, then hear the newly entered Song by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Recording display. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. CVP-701 Reference Manual 53 Recording Chords (Step Recording) You can record Chords and Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, and so on) one at a time with precise timing. These instructions show how to record chord changes using the Step Record function. 1 Press the SONG CONTROL [REC] and SONG CONTROL [STOP] buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. NOTE Selecting a blank Song initializes the panel settings. 2 3 5 Select the Style you want to use in the Song. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB [L][R] CHORD Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 4 Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display. 5 Now, go on to the next section and start Step Recording. For information on these buttons, refer to page 51. 54 CVP-701 Reference Manual Example of Step Recording — Chords NOTE This example uses a Style in 4/4 time. C 1 2 3 MAIN A BREAK MAIN B F G F G7 * The numbers shown in the illustration correspond to the respective operation step numbers below. C Before starting, make sure the [AUTO FILL IN] button is set to off since no Fill in is included in the notation example above. 1 Enter the chords for the Main A section. 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 1-1 Press the STYLE [MAIN A] button. 1-2 Press the [5] button to select the half-note length. 1-3 Play the chord C, F and G in the chord section of the keyboard. C F G 1-2 1-1 1-3 2 Enter the chords for the Break section. 2-1 Press the STYLE [BREAK] button. 2-2 Press the [6] button to select the quarter-note length. 2-3 Play the chords F and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard. F G7 2-1 2-2 2-3 NOTE To enter fill-ins, turn the [AUTO FILL IN] button to ON, and simply press the desired MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] button. CVP-701 Reference Manual 55 3 Enter the chords for the Main B section. 3-1 Press the STYLE [MAIN B] button. 3-2 Press the [4] button to select the whole-note length. 3-3 Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard. C 3-1 4 3-2 3-3 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top of the Song, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered Song. 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 5 6 7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Recording display. Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the input chord change data into the Song data. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. 56 CVP-701 Reference Manual Re-recording a Specific Section — Punch In/Out When re-recording a specific section of an already-recorded Song, use the Punch IN/OUT function. In this method, only the data between the Punch In point and the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly recorded data. Keep in mind that the notes before and after the Punch In/Out points are not recorded over, although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in and out of the Punch In/Out timing. 2 3 Select the Song you want to re-record. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB [L][R] REC MODE Determine the settings for recording. 5 [1] – [3] REC START (Punch In) Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 1 Determines the recording start behavior. NORMAL Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro Standby mode. FIRST KEY ON The Song plays back normally, then starts overwrite recording as soon as you play the keyboard. PUNCH IN AT The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indicated Punch In measure, then starts overwrite recording at that point. You can set the Punch In measure by pressing the [3] button. [4] – [6] REC END (Punch Out) Determines the recording stop behavior, or how data is handled after recording is stopped. REPLACE ALL This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped. PUNCH OUT The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as the Punch Out point. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. PUNCH OUT AT Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the specified Punch Out measure (set with the corresponding display button), at which point recording stops and normal playback continues. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. You can set the Punch Out measure by pressing the [6] buttons. CVP-701 Reference Manual 57 [7]/ [8] PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT When this is set to ON, you can use the center pedal to control the Punch In and Punch Out points. While a Song is playing back, pressing (and holding) the center pedal instantly enables Punch In recording, while releasing the pedal stops recording (Punch Out). You can press and release the center pedal as often as you want during playback to punch in/out of overwrite recording. Note that the current function assignment of the center pedal is cancelled when the Pedal Punch In/Out function is set to ON. NOTE Pedal Punch In/Out operation may be reversed depending on the particular pedal you’ve con- nected to the instrument. If necessary, change the pedal polarity to reverse the control (page 89). 4 5 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 6 While holding the SONG CONTROL [REC] button, press the desired track button. Press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start Punch In/Out recording. Play the keyboard at the Punch In point and stop recording at the Punch Out point. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.  Examples of re-recording with various Punch In/Out settings This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In/Out function. The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded. REC START setting REC END setting Original data 1 2 3 4 Start overwrite recording *1 NORMAL REPLACE ALL 1 NORMAL PUNCH OUT AT 006 1 2 3 4 1 FIRST KEY ON REPLACE ALL FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT AT 006 PUNCH IN AT 003 REPLACE ALL Play back original data 1 Play back original data 1 Play back original data 1 1 Play back original data PUNCH IN AT 003 PUNCH OUT AT 006 58 3 4 1 CVP-701 Reference Manual 8 5 *1 To avoid overwriting measures 1 – 2, start recording from measure 3. *2 To stop recording, press the [REC] button at the end of measure 5. Deleted 5 6 7 8 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data 2 3 4 2 3 2 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 Deleted Stop recording *2 4 5 6 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start overwrite recording 2 Deleted Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording 2 5 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start overwrite recording 2 6 Stop recording *2 Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording 2 5 Stop recording *2 4 Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording Play back original data PUNCH IN AT 003 PUNCH OUT 2 Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording 1 7 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording *1 Play back original data 6 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording *1 NORMAL PUNCH OUT 5 4 5 6 7 8 Previously recorded data Newly recorded data Deleted data Changing the Setup Parameters Recorded to the Song The current settings of the Mixing Console display and other panel settings can be recorded to the top position of the Song as the Setup data. The Mixing Console and panel settings recorded here are automatically recalled when the Song starts. 2 3 4 Select the Song to which you want to record the Setup data. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R]MENU 2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB[L][R] SETUP 5 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to move the Song position to the top of the Song. Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 1 Determine the Setup data to be recorded. [1] – [4] SELECT Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected Song. The items selected here can be recorded only to the top position of the Song, except for the KEYBOARD VOICE. VOICE, VOLUME, PAN, FILTER, EFFECT, TEMPO, EQ Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console. KEYBOARD VOICE Records the panel settings, including the Voice selection of the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2, and LEFT) and their on/off status. Panel settings recorded here are same as the ones memorized to the One Touch Setting. This can be recorded at any point in a Song. SCORE SETTING Records the settings in the Score display. GUIDE SETTING Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide ON/ OFF setting. LYRICS SETTING Records the settings in the Lyrics display. MIC SETTING Records the microphone settings in the MIC SETTING display. [5]/ [6] MARK ON/OFF For adding or removing checkmarks to/from the selected item. Checked items are recorded to the Song. [7]/ [8] APPLY For recording the checked item to the top position of the Song. CVP-701 Reference Manual 59 5 6 Press one of the [7]/[8] (APPLY) buttons to record the data. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The edited Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without carrying out the Save operation. Editing Channel Events You can apply various useful functions to already recorded data, such as Quantize and Transpose, on the CHANNEL page. 3 4 5 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 3 1 2 3 4 5 Select a Song to be edited. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB [L][R] CHANNEL In the CHANNEL Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu, then edit the data by using the [1] – [8] buttons. For details of the edit menu and available settings, see page 61. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation for the current display. After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the operation results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. 60 CVP-701 Reference Manual 1 QUANTIZE The Quantize function allows you to align the timing of all the notes in a channel. For example, if you record the musical phrase shown below, you may not play it with absolute precision, and your performance may have been slightly ahead of or behind the precise timing. Quantize is a convenient way to correct for this. [2]/ [3] CHANNEL Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is to be quantized. [4] – [6] SIZE Selects the quantize size (resolution). For optimum results, you should set the Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel. For example, if eighth notes are the shortest in the channel, you should use 1/8 note as the Quantize size. 5 After 1/8 note quantization 1/4 note 1/8 note 1/16 note 1/32 note 1/16 note+ 1/8 note triplet* 1/4 note triplet 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note triplet 1/8 note+ 1/8 note triplet* 1/16 note+ 1/16 note triplet* Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – Settings: The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time. For example, when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are contained in the same channel, if you quantize by the straight eighth notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to straight eighth notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel. However, if you use the eighth note + eighth note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. [7]/ [8] STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% produces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats according to the specified percentage. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. Quarter-note length Original data (assuming 4/4 meter) Quantizing strength = 100 Quantizing strength = 50 2 DELETE You can delete the data of the specified channel in the Song. Select the channel whose data is to be deleted by using the [1] – [8] buttons, then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation. CVP-701 Reference Manual 61 3 MIX This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another. [2]/ [3] SOURCE 1 Determines the MIDI channel (1 – 16) to be mixed. All MIDI events of the channel specified here are copied to the destination channel. [4]/ [5] SOURCE 2 Determines the MIDI channel (1 – 16) to be mixed. Only note events of the channel specified here are copied to the destination channel. Besides the values 1 – 16, there is a “COPY” setting that allows you to copy the data from Source 1 to the destination channel. [6]/ [7] DESTINATION Determines the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed. 4 CHANNEL TRANSPOSE This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments. NOTE Make sure not to transpose channels 9 and 10. In general, Drum kits are assigned to these channels. If you transpose the channels of Drum kits, the 5 instruments assigned to each key will be changed. Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 62 [F] CH 1–8/CH 9–16 Toggles between the two channel displays: Channels 1–8, and Channels 9–16. [G] ALL CH To simultaneously set all channels to the same value, adjust the Channel Transpose for one of the channels while holding down this button. CVP-701 Reference Manual Editing Chord Events, Notes, System Exclusive Events and Lyrics You can edit chord events, note events, System Exclusive events and lyrics in the same manner on the corresponding display: CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. and LYRICS. These displays are called “Event List display” because some events are shown in a list view. Event List display Indicates the location (position) of the corresponding event. Indicates the event value. Indicates the event type. See page 64. Moves the cursor up/down and select the desired event. [C] Moves the cursor to the top (beginning of the Song). [D]/[E] Moves the cursor left/right and select the desired parameter of the highlighted event. [H] FILTER Calls up the Filter display (page 65), letting you select only the events you wish to be shown in the event list. [I] SAVE Press to save the edited Song. [J] MULTI SEL. Holding this button while using the [A]/[B] buttons lets you select multiple events. [1] BAR Determines the position (bar/beat/clock) of the data. One clock is equal to 1/1920th of a quarter note. [2] BEAT [3] CLK [4]/ [5] DATA ENTRY Adjusts the event value. For coarse adjustment, use the [4] buttons. For fine adjustment, use the [5] buttons or [DATA ENTRY] dial. [6] CUT Executes the cut/copy/delete/paste operation. [7] COPY [7] DELETE [8] PASTE [6] INS (INSERT) Adds a new event. [8] CANCEL Cancels editing and restores the original value. 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – [A]/[B] NOTE After you edit events in the CHORD tab display, press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the data into Song data. NOTE Chord section data recorded with Realtime Recording cannot be indicated and edited on the Event List displays. CVP-701 Reference Manual 63  Chord Events (CHORD Page) Style Style Tempo Tempo Chord Chord root, Chord type, On Bass Chord Sect Style Section (Intro, Main, Fill In, Break, Ending) OnOff On/off status for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style CH.Vol Volume for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style S.Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style  Note Events (1-16 Page) 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – Note An individual note within a Song. Includes the note number which corresponds to the key which was played, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played, and the gate time value (the length of a note). Ctrl (Control Change) Settings to control the Voice, such as volume, pan, filter and effect depth (edited via the Mixing Console described in chapter 9), etc. Prog (Program Change) MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice. P.Bnd (Pitch Bend) Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously. A.T. (Aftertouch) This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played. Note that the keyboard of this instrument does not feature Aftertouch.  System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX. Page) 64 ScBar (Score Start Bar) Determines the top measure of a Song. Tempo Determines the tempo value. Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature. Key (Key signature) Determines the key signature, as well as the major/minor setting, for the music score shown on the display. XGPrm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parameters. Refer to the “MIDI Data Format” in the MIDI Reference downloadable from the Yamaha Manual Library. SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. CVP-701 Reference Manual  Lyrics Events (LYRICS Page) Name Allows you to enter the Song name. Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics. Code CR: Enters a line break in the lyrics text. LF: Clears the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics. Displaying Specific Types of Events In the Event List displays, various types of events are shown. It may sometimes be difficult to pinpoint the ones you want to edit. This is where the Filter function comes in handy. It lets you determine which event types will be shown in the Event List displays. 1 2 Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. or LYRICS displays. Checkmark the desired item to be displayed. [C] MAIN Displays all main types of events. [D] CTRL. CHG Displays all specific Control Change message events. [E] STYLE Displays all types of Style playback related events. [H] ALL ON Checkmarks all event types. [I] NOTE/ALL OFF/ CHORD “NOTE” or “CHORD” selects only NOTE/CHORD data. “ALL OFF” removes all checkmarks. [J] INVERT Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously unchecked and vice versa. [2] – [5] 3 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 5 Selects an event type to be checked or unchecked. [6]/ [7] MARK ON [6]/ [7] MARK OFF Enters/removes the checkmark for the selected event type. The checked event types can be shown on the CHORD, 116, SYS/EX. or LYRICS Page. Press the [EXIT] button to execute the settings. CVP-701 Reference Manual 65 USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playback and Recording Audio Files – This function is fully explained in the Owner’s Manual. Refer to the corresponding chapter in the Owner’s Manual. Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance – Contents Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 6 • Saving the Microphone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 • VOCAL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 • TALK Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 7 Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance – Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk) This section lets you set parameters for various Effects that are applied to the microphone sound. You should make both “Vocal” and “Talk” settings — “Vocal,” for your singing performance, and “Talk,” for making announcements between songs, for example. 1 2 3 Connect the microphone to the instrument, then call up the MIC SETTING display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [F] MIC SETTING Press the [F] button to turn the MIC on. This lets you talk into the microphone and hear the changes made while setting the parameters. Select the desired page, VOCAL or TALK, by using the TAB [L][R] buttons. VOCAL page 1 2 TALK page 1 2 1 MIC ON/OFF Turns the microphone sound on or off. 2 TALK ON/OFF Switches the microphone setup between the Vocal setup (for singing and normal performance) and Talk setup (for making announcements or talking between songs). When set to ON, only the Talk settings are active. When set to OFF, only the Vocal settings are active. 66 CVP-701 Reference Manual To get the most convenient use of this Talk function, use the [1] button to assign one of the pedals (Left, Center, or AUX) to “TALK” in the following display: [DIRECT ACCESS] → press one of the pedals (Left, Center, or AUX) This allows you to use one of the pedals to switch the Talk function on and off during your performance, without having to call up the menu above. 4 5 Use the [A] – [E] buttons to select the specific row (or group) of parameters to be adjusted. Set the value of specific parameters in the row by using the [1] – [6] buttons. For information on each parameter, see page 67 – 68. NOTICE After setting, go to the Mic Setting Memory display by pressing the [H] (USER MEMORY) button and save the settings (see below section). The settings will be lost if you exit from this display or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Saving the Microphone Settings All the settings (VOCAL/TALK pages) are saved together as a single file. Up to ten files can be saved. For ease in future recall, you should assign a sufficiently descriptive name to the file or one that matches your performance. 2 7 On the MIC SETTING display (in step 3 above), press the [H] (USER MEMORY) button. Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the file to USER. For details on the naming and deleting procedures, refer to the “Renaming a File/Folder” and “Deleting Files/Folders” sections in the Owner’s Manual. Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance – 1 NOTE The microphone setting file can be saved only to the internal USER drive. If you want to save this setting to the USB flash drive, save the User Effect file on the display called up via [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [G] SYSTEM → TAB [L][R] SETUP FILES → [H] (USER EFFECT FILES) → TAB [L][R] USB → [6] (SAVE). Calling Up the Microphone Settings Saved to USER 1 2 Call up the Mic Setting Memory display by pressing the [H] (USER MEMORY) button on the MIC SETTING display. Use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired setting file. VOCAL Page 3-BAND EQ (selected by [A]/[B] buttons) EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands which can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. This instrument features a high-grade three-band (LOW, MID and HIGH) digital equalizer function for the microphone sound. [1]/ [3]/ [5] Hz Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band. [2]/ [4]/ [6] dB Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB. CVP-701 Reference Manual 67 NOISE GATE (selected by [C]/[D] buttons) This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level. This effectively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass. [1] SW (Switch) Turns the Noise Gate on or off. [2] TH. (Threshold) Adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open. COMPRESSOR (selected by [C]/[D] buttons) This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level. This is especially useful for smoothing out vocals that have widely varying dynamics. It effectively “compresses” the signal, making soft parts louder and loud parts softer. For a maximum compression effect, set RATIO to a high setting and adjust the OUT parameter for optimum volume. [3] SW (Switch) Turns the Compressor on or off. [4] TH. (Threshold) Adjusts the input level above which the Compressor is applied. [5] RATIO Adjusts the compression ratio. Higher ratios result in a more compressed sound, with a reduced dynamic range. [6] OUT Adjusts the final output level. TALK Page 7 Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance – The settings here are for your speech or announcements (NOT your singing performance), and are active when the TALK (page 66) is set to ON. All indications and parameters (with the exception of TALK MIXING below) are the same as in the VOCAL page. However, the settings are independent from those in the VOCAL page. TALK MIXING (selected by [E] button) 68 [1] VOLUME Determines the output volume of the microphone sound. [2] PAN Determines the stereo pan position of the microphone sound. [3] REVERB DEPTH Determines the depth of the reverb effects applied to the microphone sound. [4] CHORUS DEPTH Determines the depth of the chorus effects applied to the microphone sound. [5]/ [6] REDUCTION LEVEL Determines the amount of reduction to be applied to the overall sound (excepting the microphone input) — allowing you to effectively adjust the balance between your voice and the overall instrument sound. CVP-701 Reference Manual Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – Contents Registering a Song, Audio or Style File (SONG/AUDIO/STYLE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 • Recalling the Registered Data from Music Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Creating a Set of Favorite Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Editing Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Saving the Record as a Single File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 • Calling Up Music Finder Records Saved to USER or USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Registering a Song, Audio or Style File (SONG/AUDIO/STYLE) By registering a Song, Audio or Style file in various locations (Preset, User and USB) into Music Finder, you can conveniently and easily call up the file from the Song title. NOTE If you want to register files in the USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive containing the data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 2 3 4 On the corresponding File Selection display, select a Song, Audio or Style File to be registered to the Music Finder. 8 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary. Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – 1 Press the [5] (ADD TO MF) button to register the selected file to Music Finder. The display automatically changes to the Music Finder Record Edit display. Press [8] (OK) button to start the registration. Press the [8] (CANCEL) button to cancel the registration. CVP-701 Reference Manual 69 5 Confirm that the registered file name is shown in the MUSIC column while (SONG), (AUDIO) or the Style name is shown in the STYLE column. Recalling the Registered Data from Music Finder You can recall the registered Song, Audio or Style data in the same way as done in the “Selecting Desired Panel Settings from the Records” and “Searching for the Panel Settings” in the Owner’s Manual, chapter 8. 8 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – NOTE If you want to play back files in the USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive containing the data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal beforehand. To play back the registered files • To play back a recalled Song file, press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button after selecting the SONG record. • To play back a recalled Audio file, press the [J] (AUDIO) button in the MUSIC FINDER display after selecting the AUDIO record. • To play back a recalled Style file, select the Style record then follow the same procedure as in Style playback described in the Owner’s Manual, chapter 3. 70 CVP-701 Reference Manual Creating a Set of Favorite Records As convenient as the Search function is in exploring the depths of the Music Finder records, you may want to create a custom “folder” of your favorite records — so you can quickly call up the panel settings and song data you use frequently. 1 2 Call up the MUSIC FINDER display by pressing the [MUSIC FINDER] button and select the desired record. Press the [H] (ADD TO FAVORITE) button to add the selected record to the FAVORITE display, then press the [G] (YES) button to actually add the record. 3 2 Call up the FAVORITE display by using the TAB [L][R] buttons, and check to see if the record has been added. 8 Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Display 1 2 Select the record you want to delete from the FAVORITE display. Press the [H] (DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button, then press the [G] (YES) button to actually delete the record. CVP-701 Reference Manual Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – 3 71 Editing Records You can create a new record by editing the currently selected record. The newly created records are automatically saved in the internal memory. 1 8 Call up the MUSIC FINDER display by pressing the [MUSIC FINDER] button and select the desired record to be edited. 2 Press the [8] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the EDIT display. 3 Edit the record as desired. Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – [A] MUSIC Edits the song name. Pressing the [A] button calls up the pop-up window for entering the song name. [B] KEYWORD Edits the keyword. Pressing the [B] button calls up the pop-up window to enter the keyword. [C] STYLE/SONG/ AUDIO Changes the Style in case of STYLE record (panel settings). Pressing the [C] button calls up the Style Selection display. After selecting the desired Style, press the [EXIT] button to return back to the Edit display. For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be edited. [D] BEAT Changes the beat (time signature) of the record for search purposes. For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be edited. NOTE Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function; this does not affect the actual Beat setting of the Style itself. [E] FAVORITE Selects whether the edited record is entered to the FAVORITE display or not. [1] TEMPO Changes the Tempo. For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be changed. [2] SECTION Selects the section that will automatically be called up set when the record is selected. This is useful, for example, when you want to have a selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro section. For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be changed. [5]/ [6] GENRE Selects the desired genre. [7] GENRE NAME Creates a new genre. [I] DELETE RECORD Deletes the currently selected record. [4] 72 CVP-701 Reference Manual 4 Enter the edits you’ve made to the record as described below. Creating a new record Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. The record is added to the ALL display. If you’ve entered the record to the FAVORITE display in step 3, the record is added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE display. Overwriting an existing record Press the [8] (OK) button. If you set the record as a Favorite in step 3, the record is added to the FAVORITE display. When you edit the record in the FAVORITE display, the record is overwritten. To cancel and quit the Edit operation, press the [8] (CANCEL) button. Saving the Record as a Single File The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and additionally created records as a single file. Keep in mind that individual records (panel settings and song data) cannot be handled as separate files. 1 2 3 Call up the Save display. [MUSIC FINDER] → [7] FILES Press the TAB [L][R] buttons to select the location for saving (USER or USB). Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the current file. All records are saved together as a single file. 8 1 2 3 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – Calling Up Music Finder Records Saved to USER or USB Call up the File Selection display. [MUSIC FINDER] → [7] FILES Use the TAB [L][R] buttons to select USER or USB. Press the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Music Finder file. When the file is selected, a message is displayed according to the content of the file. Press the desired button. [F] REPLACE All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected file. NOTICE Selecting “REPLACE” automatically deletes all your original records from internal memory. Make sure that all important data has been archived to another location beforehand. [G] APPEND The records called up are added to the record currently in the instrument. [H] CANCEL Selecting this button aborts the operation (the selected file is not called up). CVP-701 Reference Manual 73 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – Contents Deleting or Renaming the Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Confirming the Registration Memory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 • Confirming the Registration Sequence Setting in the Main Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 • Saving the Registration Sequence Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Deleting or Renaming the Registration 1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display, then select the Registration Memory bank which contains the Registration you want to delete or rename. 1 9 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 3 2 NOTE No Registration banks will be shown in this display unless you have saved one or more beforehand. 2 3 74 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary. Press the [7] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT display. Registrations in the selected bank will be displayed. CVP-701 Reference Manual 4 To delete the Registration, press the [5] (DELETE) button; to rename it, press the [1] (NAME) button. 5 5 Select a Registration you want to delete or rename by pressing one of the [A] – [D] and [F] – [I] buttons. The subsequent procedures are basically the same as those of renaming or deleting files described in the Owner’s Manual. Confirming the Registration Memory Information You can call up the information display to take a look which Voices and Style are memorized to the [1] – [8] buttons of a Registration Memory Bank. 1 Simultaneously press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons to call up the Registration Bank Selection display, then use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Bank. 9 NOTE You can instantly call up the information display of the currently selected Registration Memory Bank by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and one 2 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons in sequence. Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary. 4 3 3 4 2 Press the [6] (INFO) button to call up the information display. By using the TAB [L][R] buttons, you can switch between the two information display pages: information for the Registration Memory [1] – [4] buttons and information for the [5] – [8] buttons. Press the [F] (CLOSE) button to close the information display. NOTE If certain Voice parts are set to off, the Voice part names for the corresponding parts are shown in gray. CVP-701 Reference Manual 75 Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single button press. However, there may be times that you want certain items to remain the same, even when switching Registration Memory setups. For example, you may want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same accompaniment Style. This is where the Freeze function comes in handy. It lets you maintain the settings of certain items and leave them unchanged, even when selecting other Registration Memory buttons. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [C] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE → TAB [L][R] FREEZE Determine the items to be “frozen.” Select the desired item by using the [1] – [3] buttons, then enter or remove the checkmark by using the [4]/[5] (MARK ON)/[4]/[5] (MARK OFF) buttons. 3 9 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 3 Press the [F] (REGISTRATION FREEZE) button to turn the Freeze function on. 4 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display. Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence) As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are, there may be times during a performance when you want to quickly switch between settings — without having to take your hands from the keyboard. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify, by simply using the TAB [L][R] buttons or the pedal as you play. 1 2 76 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display, then select the desired Registration Memory bank to program a sequence. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [C] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE → TAB [L][R] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE CVP-701 Reference Manual 3 If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings, specify here how the pedal will be used — to advance or to reverse through the sequence. Use the [C] (REGIST+ PEDAL) button to select the pedal for advancing through the sequence. Use the [D] (REGIST- PEDAL) button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence. Indicates the name of the currently selected Registration Memory Bank. 6 3 4 NOTE If you assign the function to a pedal here, the other function set in the PEDAL display (page 88) becomes invalid. 4 Use the [E] (SEQUENCE END) button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence. • STOP Pressing the TAB [R] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is “stopped.” • TOP The sequence starts again at the beginning. • NEXT BANK The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory Bank in the same folder. Program the Sequence order, from left to right. Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons on the panel, then press the [6] (INSERT) button to input the number. 9 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 5 Indicates the Registration Memory numbers, in the order of the current Registration Sequence. [1] – [4] CURSOR Moves the cursor. [5] REPLACE Replaces the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number. [6] INSERT Inserts the number of the currently selected Registration Memory number before the cursor position. [7] DELETE Deletes the number at the cursor position. [8] CLEAR Deletes all numbers in the sequence. 6 Press the [F] button to turn the Registration Sequence function on. 7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display. NOTE If you do not close the setting display and it remains open, you cannot call up the Registration Sequence even when you press the pedal. CVP-701 Reference Manual 77 Confirming the Registration Sequence Setting in the Main Display In the Main display, you can confirm whether the Registration Memory numbers are called up according to the sequence programmed on pages 76 – 77. The Registration Sequence is indicated at the top right of the Main display, letting you confirm the currently selected number. To shift the Registration Memory numbers, use the TAB [L][R] buttons when the Main display is shown. When pedal operation has been set in step 3 on page 77, you can also use a pedal to select the Registration Memory numbers in order. Pressing the TAB [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously when the Main display is shown cancels the currently selected Sequence number (the box indicator at the top right goes out). The first Sequence will be selected by pressing one of the TAB [L][R] buttons or by pressing the pedal. NOTE The pedal can be used for Registration Sequence no matter which display is called up (except for the display in step 3 on page 77). Saving the Registration Sequence Settings The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the Registration Memory Bank file. To store your newly programmed Registration Sequence, save the current Registration Memory Bank file. NOTICE Keep in mind that all Registration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory Banks, unless you’ve saved it with the Registration Memory Bank file. 9 1 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 2 3 78 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display. Call up MENU2 at the bottom right of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary. Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the Bank file. CVP-701 Reference Manual Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – Contents Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – • Adjusting Panning/Volume for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 • Changing the Voice for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Editing FILTER Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Editing TUNE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Editing EFFECT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 • Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 • Creating an Original Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Editing EQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Selecting the Master EQ Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Editing Master Compressor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 • Saving Master Compressor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 The MIXING CONSOLE display called up via the [MIXING CONSOLE] button consists of several pages of parameters. Use the TAB [L]/[R] buttons to call up the desired page, and set various parameters for each part to adjust the balance between parts and create your desired sound. Note that the Save operation for your settings will differ depending on the part. For instructions, refer to the Owner’s Manual. Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters 10 Adjusting Panning/Volume for Each Part 1 Press the [D] (or [I]) button to select the PANPOT parameter or press the [E] (or [J]) button to select the VOLUME parameter. PANPOT VOLUME 2 Use the [1] – [8] buttons to adjust panning/volume for the desired part. NOTE When the display for SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected, you can switch between the two by pressing the [A] (PART) button. 3 Save your settings. Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 10. CVP-701 Reference Manual 79 Changing the Voice for Each Part You can change the Voice for each keyboard part, Style channel or Song channel. 1 Press the [C] (or [H]) button to select the VOICE parameter. 1 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 2 2 3 Press one of the [1] – [8] buttons to select the desired part. The Voice Selection display appears. Select a Voice. Press one of the Voice category selection buttons on the panel, then select a Voice by using the [A] – [J] buttons. NOTE When the display for SONG CH 1- 8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected, you can switch between the two by pressing the [A] (PART) button. NOTE Some Voices (such as Organ Flutes) cannot be selected for Style channels. NOTE Only Drum kit Voices and SFX kit Voices can be assigned to the RHY2 channel in the STYLE PART display. NOTE When playing GM Song data, channel 10 can only be used for a Drum kit Voice. 4 10 5 80 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIXING CONSOLE display. Save your settings. Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 10. CVP-701 Reference Manual [A] PART This will be displayed only if SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected for the part. Toggles between the two channel displays: SONG CH 1-8 and SONG CH 9-16. For details, refer to chapter 10 in the Owner’s Manual. [D]/[I] HARMONIC CONTENT Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (page 14) for each part. [E]/[J] BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 14). Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – Editing FILTER Parameters Editing TUNE Parameters 10 [A]/[B]/ [F]/[G] PORTAMENTO TIME Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Higher values result in a longer pitch change time. Setting this to “0” results in no effect. This parameter is available when the selected keyboard part is set to Mono. [C]/[H] PITCH BEND RANGE Determines the range of the PITCH BEND for each keyboard part (when a pedal is assigned to this function; page 88). The range is from “0” to “12” with each step corresponding to one semitone. [D]/[I] OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down for each keyboard part. [E]/[J] TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part. [1] – [3] TRANSPOSE Allows you to set transposition for overall sound of the instrument (MASTER), Song playback (SONG), or the keyboard pitch (KBD), respectively. CVP-701 Reference Manual 81 Editing EFFECT Parameters This instrument has an effect system featuring six separate blocks (Reverb, Chorus and DSP1-4). For each block, you can assign the desired effect type individually. The effects are applied independently for each part or globally for the entire sound according to the blocks: the effects of Reverb and Chorus blocks are applied to all of the parts input to the Mixing Console, DSP1 is applied only to the Style and Song sounds (or applied to a specific part of the Style or Song depending on the setting), and DSP2-4 are applied to the specific keyboard parts and Song parts. Use these instructions to set up various effects for blocks and parts to enhance the sound as desired. Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block NOTE When the display for SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected, you can switch between the two by pressing the [A] (PART) button. 1 Press the [F] (TYPE) button in the EFFECT Page of the Mixing Console display. The Effect Type Selection display is called up. 2 10 2 82 3 4 5 Use the [1]/[2] buttons to select the effect BLOCK. Effect Block Applicable parts Effect characteristics REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club. CHORUS All parts Produces a rich, “fat” sound as if several identical instruments are being played simultaneously. In addition, other type effects (such as reverb, delay, etc.) can also be selected in this effect block. DSP1 STYLE PART, SONG CHANNEL 1-16 This effect is applied only to Style/Song parts. When the “Connection” parameter selected in step 3 of “Creating an Original Effect” section (on page 83) is set to “System,” the DSP1 effect will be applied overall to the Style and Song. When it is set to “Insertion,” the DSP1 effect will be applied to a specific part of the Style or Song. DSP2-4 RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, SONG CHANNEL 1-16 For each of DSP2-4, you can select one of the parts or channels listed at left. When you select “RIGHT2” for DSP2, for example, the DSP2 Effect is applied only to the Right 2 part. Note that if you select a Song or Style which requires the DSP2-4 Blocks, the part assignment of these three Blocks will be changed automatically with last priority according to the data. CVP-701 Reference Manual 4 5 Use the [3]/[4] buttons to select the part to which you want to apply the effect. Note that a part cannot be selected if “REVERB” or “CHORUS” is selected, or if the CONNECTION parameter of “DSP1” is set to “System” (in step 3 of “Creating an Original Effect” below). This is because only one of the Effect Types can be selected to be commonly applied to all available Parts. Use the [5]/[6] buttons to select the effect CATEGORY. Use the [7]/[8] buttons to select the effect TYPE. If you want to edit the effect parameters, go on to the next operation. Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 3 Creating an Original Effect 1 2 Once you’ve selected an Effect Block and Effect Type above, press the [F] button to call up the display for editing the effect parameters. Select the desired parameter for editing by using the [2] – [4] buttons, then adjust the value by using the [5]/[6] buttons. If you have selected the REVERB, CHORUS or DSP1 effect block, you can adjust the Effect Return Level by pressing [7] button. 10 NOTE Keep in mind that in some cases noise may result if you adjust the effect parameters while playing the instrument. 4 2 3 If DSP 2 – 4 is selected as the Effect Block, edit the Variation parameter if desired. Press the [7] (VARI. DETAIL) button to call up the Variation parameter, select a parameter via the [2] – [4] buttons, and then use the [5]/[6] buttons to edit the value. This parameter is effective only when the DSP VARIATION in the VOICE EFFECT display is set to on. To close the Variation parameter display, press the [EXIT] button. CVP-701 Reference Manual 83 4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the display for saving your original effect. 4, 6 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 5 5 6 Use the [3] – [6] buttons to select the destination for saving the effect. The maximum number for effects that can be saved differs depending on the effect block. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the effect. In the Naming window called up via this operation, assign the name to the User Effect Type then press the [8] (OK) button to save the User Effect Type. If you want to call up the User Effect Type saved here, use the same procedure as in steps 4 – 5 of “Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block.” Editing EQ Parameters 10 [A] PART This will be displayed only if SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected for the part. Toggles between the two channel displays: SONG CH 1-8 and SONG CH 9-16. For details, refer to chapter 10 in the Owner’s Manual. [D]/[I] EQ HIGH Boosts or attenuates the high EQ band for each part. [E]/[J] EQ LOW Boosts or attenuates the low EQ band for each part. Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound from speakers to match the special character of the room. For example, you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes. 84 CVP-701 Reference Manual Selecting the Master EQ Type The instrument possesses a high-quality five-band digital EQ. With this function, a final effect — tone control — can be added to the output of your instrument. You can select one of the five preset EQ settings in the MEQ display. You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the frequency bands, and save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types. Gain Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”) Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 0 Freq (Frequency) 5 bands → 1 LOW EQ1 LOWMID EQ2 MID EQ3 HIGHMID EQ4 HIGH EQ5 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset Master EQ type. • FLAT: Flat EQ settings. The gain of each frequency is set to 0dB. • LOW CUT: EQ setting for decreasing the level of the low frequencies, making the sound clearer. • LOW BOOST: EQ setting for boosting the level of the low frequencies, making the sound more powerful. • HIGH CUT: EQ setting for decreasing the level of the high frequencies, making the sound more mellow. • HIGH BOOST: EQ setting for boosting the level of the high frequencies, making the sound brighter. • USER1/2: Your own custom EQ settings saved in step 4. The set parameters of the selected Master EQ type are automatically shown at the bottom of the display. 1 10 4 3 2, 3 2 3 4 Use the [E]/[J] buttons to move the cursor to the GAIN row, then use the [1] – [5] buttons to adjust the GAIN level to boost or cut each of the five bands. To boost or cut all the five bands at the same time, use the [6]/[7] buttons. Adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the band selected in step 2. To adjust the bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”), use the [C]/[H] buttons to move the cursor to the Q row, then use the [2] – [4] buttons. The higher the value of Q, the narrower the band width. To adjust the FREQ (center frequency), use the [D]/[I] buttons to move the cursor to the FREQ row, then use the [1] – [5] buttons. The available FREQ range is different for each band. Press the [F] or [G] (STORE 1 or 2) button to save the edited Master EQ type. In the Naming display called up via this operation, assign the name then press the [8] (OK) button to store your settings as a User Master EQ Type, which can be called up via the [A]/[B] buttons. CVP-701 Reference Manual 85 Editing Master Compressor Settings Compressor is an effect commonly used to limit and compress the dynamics (softness/loudness) of an audio signal. For signals that vary widely in dynamics, such as vocals and guitar parts, it “squeezes” the dynamic range, effectively making soft sounds louder and loud sounds softer. When used with gain to boost the overall level, this creates a more powerful, more consistently high-level sound. This instrument features a Master Compressor which is applied to the entire sound of this instrument. Although preset Master Compressor settings are provided, you can also create and save your original Master Compressor by adjusting the related parameters. NOTE Master Compressor cannot be applied to an audio file or the Metronome sound. Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – The indication “GAIN REDUCTION” shows the Gain Reduction (compressed level) while “OUTPUT” shows the output level according to the instrument sound in real time. 10 86 [F] ON/OFF Turns the Master Compressor effect on or off. [1]/ [2] TYPE Selects a Master Compressor type. [3]/ [4] THRESHOLD OFFSET Determines the threshold (minimum level at which compression starts). [5]/ [6] RATIO OFFSET Determines the ratio of compression (how much the dynamic range is compressed). [7]/ [8] OUTPUT GAIN OFFSET Determines the output level. CVP-701 Reference Manual Saving Master Compressor Settings The Master Compressor settings you have edited on page 86 can be saved as a User Compressor type. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to enter the USER MASTER COMPRESSOR display. 1 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 1 3 2 2 3 4 5 Select the destination to which the User Master Compressor is to be saved, by using the [3] – [6] buttons. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to open the SAVE display. Enter the name of the edited Compressor type, then press the [8] (OK) button to actually save the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. The saved Compressor type is shown in the TYPE selection at the bottom left of the display and can be selected in the same way as the preset types. CVP-701 Reference Manual 10 87 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Contents Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 • Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Wireless LAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – • Infrastructure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 • Ad Hoc Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 MIDI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 • MIDI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 • MIDI Transmit Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 • MIDI Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 • Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 • Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal In addition to the footswitch or foot controller, the three piano pedals installed to the instrument (Right, Center and Left pedals) can also be assigned to various functions here. The following explanations cover the related operations and assignable functions (parameters). NOTE For information on how to connect a Footswitch or Foot Controller, refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 11. 1 11 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [L][R] PEDAL Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select one of the three pedals or the AUX-connected pedal, to which the function is to be assigned. 2 5 6 3 88 CVP-701 Reference Manual 4 3 Use the [1] buttons to select the function to be assigned to the pedal specified in step 2. For information on available parameters, see pages 89 – 91. NOTE You can also assign other functions to the pedal — Punch in/out of Song (page 57) and Registration Sequence (page 76). If you assign multiple func- tions to the pedal, the priority is: Punch in/out of Song → Registration Sequence → functions assigned here. 5 6 Use the [2] – [8] buttons to set the details of the selected functions (the part for which the function is applied, etc.). The available parameters differ depending on the function selected in step 3. When you have selected the left or center pedal in step 2, press the [H] (SWITCH WITH R1 VOICE) button to turn this parameter OFF. This setting locks the pedal function so that it does not change automatically when you change the Right 1 Voice. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 4 If necessary, set the polarity of the pedal by using the [I] button. Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the instrument. For example, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on, while pressing a different make/brand of pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this setting to reverse the operation.  Assignable Pedal Functions For functions indicated with “*”, use only the foot controller; proper operation cannot be done with a footswitch. ARTICULATION When you use a Super Articulation Voice that has an effect assigned to the pedal/footswitch, you can enable the effect by pressing the pedal/footswitch. You can turn this function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume. This function is available only for the pedal connected to the instrument’s AUX PEDAL jack. SUSTAIN Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain. When you press and hold the pedal, all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. If you are using the right pedal or connected foot controller, the “HALF PEDAL POINT” parameter allows you to specify how far down you should press on the pedal until the damper effect starts working. SOSTENUTO 11 Allows you to use a pedal to control the Sostenuto effect. If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. However, all subsequent notes will not sustain. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato. NOTE This function will not affect any of the Organ Flutes and only some of the Super Articulation Voices, even if this has been assigned to the Foot Pedals. SOFT Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect. Pressing this pedal reduces the volume and changes the timbre of the notes you play. This is effective only for certain appropriate Voices. You can turn this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. If you are using the right pedal or connected foot controller, the “HALF PEDAL POINT” parameter allows you to specify how far down you should press on the pedal until the soft effect starts working. CVP-701 Reference Manual 89 GLIDE When the pedal is pressed, the pitch changes, and then returns to normal pitch when the pedal is released. The following parameters can be set for this function on this display. UP/DOWN Determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered). RANGE Determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones. ON SPEED Determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is pressed. OFF SPEED Determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is released. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – LEFT, RIGHT 1, 2 Turns this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part. PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento time can also be adjusted form the Mixing Console display (page 81). This function does not affect certain Natural Voices, which would not sound appropriately with this function. NOTE This function will not affect any of the Organ Flutes, Super Articulation Voices and only some of the Super Articulation Voices, even if this has been assigned to the Foot Pedals. PITCH BEND* Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal. This function can be assigned to the right pedal or connected foot controller. The following parameters can be set for this function on this display. UP/DOWN Determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered). RANGE Determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones. LEFT, RIGHT 1, 2 Turns this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part. 11 90 MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. Moreover, various effects can be added to the Super Articulation Voice. The effect becomes deeper when pressing down the foot controller. You can turn this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. MODULATION (ALT) This is a slight variation on MODULATION above, in which the effects (waveform) can be switched on/off by each press of the pedal/footswitch. The modulation effect is alternately turned on and off each time the pedal/footswitch is pressed. You can turn this function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. DSP VARIATION Switches Voice Effect DSP VARIATION on and off. VIBE ROTOR ON/OFF Switches the VIBRATE SW parameter on and off when the VIBE VIBRATE effect type is selected. KEYBOARD HARMONY Switches the Harmony or Echo effect on and off. TALK Switches the microphone setup settings between Vocal and Talk. CVP-701 Reference Manual While the Song is stopped, you can turn to the next/previous score page (one page at a time). LYRICS PAGE +/- While the Song is stopped, you can turn to the next/previous lyrics page (one page at a time). SONG PLAY/PAUSE Same as the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button. TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button. SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNC START] button. SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC STOP] button. INTRO 1–3 Same as the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons. MAIN A–D Same as the MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] buttons. FILL DOWN Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left. FILL SELF Plays a fill-in. FILL BREAK Plays a break. FILL UP Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right. ENDING1–3 Same as the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons. FADE IN/OUT Switches Fade In /Fade Out function on and off. FINGERD/FING ON BASS The pedal alternately switches the Chord Fingering types between the Fingered and Fingering On Bass. BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed during Style playback. If the fingering is set to “AI FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work. PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4] – [8] buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – SCORE PAGE +/- 11 NOTE When you select the percussion instrument by pressing a key on the keyboard, the velocity with which you press the key determines the percussion volume. RIGHT 1 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button. RIGHT 2 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button. LEFT ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button. OTS +/- Calls up the next/previous One Touch Setting. CVP-701 Reference Manual 91 Wireless LAN Settings By using a USB wireless LAN adaptor UD-WL01 (sold separately), you can connect this instrument with an iPhone/iPad via a wireless network. For general operating instructions, refer to the iPhone/iPad Connection Manual. This section covers only operations that are specific to this instrument. Before starting operations, make sure that the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal and call up the setup display via [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU 2 → [H] WIRELESS LAN. NOTE If the USB wireless LAN adaptor is not recognized by the instrument, “WIRELESS LAN” for the [H] button is not shown. When “WIRELESS LAN” is not shown even though a USB wireless LAN adaptor has been connected, turn the instrument off then on again. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Infrastructure Mode [A]/[B] 11 Selects the network. [G] UPDATE Updates the network list on the display. [I] DETAIL Sets the detailed parameters. After making these settings, press one of the [7]/[8] (SAVE) button to actually save them. IP ADDRESS: Sets the IP address and other related parameters. OTHERS: When the instrument is connected to the network with the Infrastructure Mode, the current time is shown on the Main display. You can set the Time Zone via the [B] button and Daylight Saving Time via the [C] button for your local time. [1]/ [2] WPS Connects this instrument to the network via WPS. After pressing this button, press the WPS button on your access point within two minutes. NOTE Make sure that your access point supports WPS. About the confirmation and changes in the access point settings, refer to the manual of the access point. 92 [3]/ [4] MODE CHANGE Switches to the Ad Hoc Mode. [5]/ [6] INITIALIZE Initializes the connection setup to the default factory status. CVP-701 Reference Manual [7]/ [8] CONNECT Connects to the selected network. If you select “Other” by using the [A]/[B] buttons, this calls up the Manual Setup display in which you set the SSID, security method, and password. After entering those, press one of the [7]/[8] buttons in the Manual Setup display to connect to the network. [I] DETAIL Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Ad Hoc Mode Sets the detailed parameters. After making these settings, press one of the [7]/[8] (SAVE) button to actually save them. WIRELESS NETWORK: Sets the SSID, security, password, and channel. IP ADDRESS: Sets the IP address and other related parameters. OTHERS: Enters the Host name or shows MAC address, etc. [3]/ [4] MODE CHANGE Switches to the Infrastructure Mode. [5]/ [6] INITIALIZE Initializes the connection setup to the default factory status. CVP-701 Reference Manual 11 93 MIDI Settings In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. This instrument gives you a set of ten pre-programmed templates that let you instantly and easily reconfigure the instrument to match your particular MIDI application or external device. Also, you can edit the pre-programmed templates and save up to ten of your original templates to the USER display. NOTE You can save all your original templates as a single file to USB flash drive: [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [G] SYSTEM → TAB [L][R] SETUP FILES → [G] MIDI SETUP FILES. See page 106. 1 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [I] MIDI Select a pre-programmed template from the PRESET Page (page 95). If you have already created an original template and saved it to the USER Page, you can also select that template from the USER Page. 2 6 11 3 Press the [8] (EDIT) button to call up the MIDI display to edit the selected template. 4 Use the TAB [L][R] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. 5 6 94 3 • SYSTEM MIDI System Settings (page 96) • TRANSMIT MIDI Transmission Settings (page 97) • RECEIVE MIDI Reception Settings (page 98) • BASS Settings for the bass note of chord for Style playback via MIDI reception data (page 99) • CHORD DETECT Settings for the chord type for Style playback via MIDI reception data (page 99) When you’ve finished editing, press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIDI template Selection display. Select the USER tab display by using the TAB [L][R] buttons, then press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the edited template. CVP-701 Reference Manual All Parts Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2, and LEFT), with the exception of Song parts. KBD & STYLE Basically the same as “ALL PARTS” with the exception of how keyboard parts are managed. The right-hand parts are handled as “UPPER” instead of RIGHT 1 and 2 and the left-hand part is handled as “LOWER.” Master KBD In this setting, the instrument functions as a “master” keyboard, playing and controlling one or more connected tone generators or other devices (such as a computer/sequencer). Song All transmit channels are set to correspond to Song channels 1–16. This is used to play Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an external sequencer. Clock Ext Playback or recording (Song, Style, etc.) synchronizes with an external MIDI clock instead of the instrument’s internal clock. This template should be used when you wish to set the tempo on the MIDI device connected to the instrument. MIDI Accord1 MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone generators from the keyboard and bass/chord buttons of the accordion. This template lets you play melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback on the instrument with the left-hand buttons. MIDI Accord2 Basically the same as “MIDI Accord1” above, with the exception that the chord/bass notes you play with your left hand on a MIDI Accordion are recognized also as MIDI note events. MIDI Pedal1 MIDI pedal units allow you play connected tone generators with your feet (especially convenient for playing single note bass parts). This template lets you play/control the chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit. MIDI Pedal2 This template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI pedal unit. MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received. CVP-701 Reference Manual Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –  Pre-programmed MIDI Templates 11 95 MIDI Settings The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM Page in step 4 on page 94. Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the parameters (below), then set the ON/OFF status by using the [1] – [8] buttons. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 1 Local Control Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the instrument controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal Voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the instrument’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the instrument’s internal Voices, and use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator. 2 Clock setting, etc.  CLOCK Determines whether the instrument is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the instrument is being used alone or as a master keyboard to control external devices. If you are using the instrument with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it to that device, set this parameter to the appropriate setting: MIDI, USB 1, or USB 2. In this case, make sure that the external device is connected properly (e.g., to the instrument’s MIDI IN terminal), and that it is properly transmitting a MIDI clock signal. When this is set for control by an external device (MIDI, USB 1 or USB 2), the Tempo is indicated as “Ext.” in the Main display. 11 NOTE If the Clock is set to something other than INTERNAL, the Style or Song cannot be played from the panel buttons. NOTE When a USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, the “WIRELESS LAN” parameter can also be selected.  TRANSMIT CLOCK Turns MIDI clock (F8) transmission on or off. When set to OFF, no MIDI clock or Start/Stop data is transmitted even if a Song or Style is played back.  RECEIVE TRANSPOSE Determines whether or not the instrument’s transpose setting is applied to the note events received by the instrument via MIDI.  START/STOP Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect Song or Style playback. 3 MESSAGE SW (Message Switch)  SYS/EX. The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI System Exclusive messages on or off. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclusive messages generated by external equipment on or off. 96 CVP-701 Reference Manual  CHORD SYS/EX. The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI Chord System Exclusive data (chord detect, root and type) on or off. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment on or off. MIDI Transmit Settings Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT Page in step 4 on page 94. This determines which parts will be sent as MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent. The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the channel(s). NOTE If “WLAN” is shown, this instrument can handle MIDI messages received via the USB wireless LAN adaptor connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When “WLAN” is not shown although the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected, turn the instrument off then on again. 1 1 1 2 3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons or [1]/[2] buttons to select the part for changing transmit settings. With the exception of the two parts below, the configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in the Owner’s Manual. UPPER A keyboard part played on the right side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices (RIGHT 1 and/or 2). 11 LOWER A keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices. This is not affected by the on/off status of the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. 2 Use the [3] buttons to select a channel via which the selected part will be transmitted. NOTE If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts, the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel — resulting in unex- pected sounds and possible glitches in the connected MIDI device. NOTE Protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper Song channels 1-16 are set to be transmitted. 3 Use the [4] – [8] button to determine the types of data to be sent. The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANSMIT/RECEIVE display. NOTE (Note events) .........page 64 CONTROL CHANGE ......page 64 PROGRAM CHANGE .....page 64 PITCH BEND ...................page 64 AFTER TOUCH................page 64 CVP-701 Reference Manual 97 MIDI Receive Settings The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE Page in step 4 on page 94. This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channels the data will be received. The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) flash briefly whenever any data is received on the channel(s). NOTE If “WLAN” is shown, this instrument can handle Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – MIDI messages received via the USB wireless LAN adaptor connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When “WLAN” is not shown although the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected, turn the instrument off then on again. 1 1 1 2 2 3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons or [1]/[2] buttons to select the channel to be received. The instrument can receive MIDI messages over 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) by USB connection. Use the [3] buttons to select the part via which the selected channel will be received. With the exception of the two parts below, the configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in the Owner’s Manual. KEYBOARD The received note messages control the instrument’s keyboard performance. EXTRA PART 1–5 There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument itself. The instrument can be used as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator by using these five parts in addition to the parts. 11 3 Use the [4] – [8] button to determine the types of data to be received. MIDI transmission/reception via the USB terminal and MIDI terminals The relationship between the [MIDI] terminals and the [USB] terminal which can be used for transmitting/receiving 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) of the MIDI messages is as follows:  MIDI reception [MIDI IN] jack  MIDI transmission [USB TO HOST] jack Wireless LAN [MIDI OUT] jack [USB TO HOST] jack Wireless LAN Port handling USB1 USB2 Merge MIDI/USB1/ WLAN 01–16 98 CVP-701 Reference Manual USB2 01–16 MIDI/USB/WLAN 01–16 Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the BASS Page in step 4 on page 94. These settings let you determine the bass note for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the bass notes of the chords of Style playback. The bass note will be detected regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or split point settings. When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels . Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 1 2 1 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the channel. Use the [1] – [8] buttons to set the desired channel to ON or OFF. You can also set all channels to OFF by pressing the [I] (ALL OFF) button. Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT Page in step 4 on page 94. These settings let you determine the chord type for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the notes for detecting chords in Style playback. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The chord types will be detected regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or Split Point settings. When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the chord type is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. 11 The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the BASS display above. CVP-701 Reference Manual 99 Utility / System – Making Global Settings – Contents CONFIG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 CONFIG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 PARAMETER LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 OWNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 BACKUP/RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 SETUP FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Utility / System – Making Global Settings – CONFIG1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [J] UTILITY → TAB [L][R] CONFIG1 Select the desired parameter: 1 Fade In/Out 2 Metronome 3 Tap Percussion 4 AUTO POWER OFF 5 LCD BRIGHTNESS 12 1 Fade In/Out These parameters determine the behavior when the Style or Song playback is faded in/out. 100 [3] FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from minimum to maximum (range of 0 – 20.0 seconds). [4] FADE OUT TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go from maximum to minimum (range of 0 – 20.0 seconds). [5] FADE OUT HOLD TIME Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 – 5.0 seconds). CVP-701 Reference Manual 2 Metronome [2] VOLUME Determines the level of the metronome sound. [3] – [5] SOUND Determines which sound is used for the metronome. BELL OFF..................Conventional metronome sound, with no bell accent. BELL ON ...................Conventional metronome sound, with bell accent. ENGLISH VOICE ......Count in English GERMAN VOICE......Count in German JAPANESE VOICE ....Count in Japanese FRENCH VOICE .......Count in French SPANISH VOICE.......Count in Spanish [6]/ [7] TIME SIGNATURE Determines the time signature of the metronome sound. [2] – [4] PERCUSSION Selects the instrument. [5]/ [6] VELOCITY Sets the velocity. Utility / System – Making Global Settings – 3 Tap Percussion This allows you to set the drum sound and the velocity which will sound when the Tap function is used. 4 AUTO POWER OFF [4]/ [5] AUTO POWER OFF Determines the amount of time that elapses before the power is automatically turned off. The setting range is DISABLED/5/10/15/30/60/120 (minutes). 5 LCD BRIGHTNESS Refer to the Owner’s Manual. 12 CVP-701 Reference Manual 101 CONFIG2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [J] UTILITY → TAB [L][R] CONFIG2 Select the desired parameter: 1 Speaker 2 Voice Category Button Options/Display-related Settings Utility / System – Making Global Settings – 1 Speaker-related settings [1]/ [2] SPEAKER Determines whether or not the speaker will sound. HEADPHONE SW Speaker sounds normally, but is cut off when headphones are inserted to the PHONES jack. ON: Speaker sound is always on. OFF: Speaker sound is off. You can only hear the instrument sound via the headphones. [3]/ [4] STEREOPHONIC OPTIMIZER 12 Turns the Stereophonic Optimizer on or off. • On......This function is effective on the VRM Voices sounded from the headphone(s) connected to the [PHONE] jack(s). NOTE In case the “Speaker” setting above is “On” and headphone(s) are connected to the [PHONES] jack(s), this function is effective on the VRM Voices from the headphone(s) as well as from the speakers of the instrument. NOTE In case the headphone(s) are connected to the [PHONES] jack(s) and external audio devices are connected to the AUX OUT[L/L+R]/[R] jacks, this function is effective on the VRM Voices from the headphone(s) as well as from the audio devices. • Off .....The effect of Stereophonic Optimizer is not applied. 102 [5]/ [6] AUX IN NOISE GATE This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the AUX IN falls below a specified level. [7] I.A. CONTROL ON/OFF I.A. Control (Intelligent Acoustic Control) is a function which automatically adjusts and controls the sound quality according to the overall volume of the instrument. Even when the volume is low, it permits both low sounds and high sounds to be clearly heard. I.A. Control is effective only from the sound output of the instrument speakers. [8] I.A. CONTROL DEPTH This sets the depth of the I.A. Control. The higher the value, the more clearly that low and high sounds are heard at lower volume levels. CVP-701 Reference Manual 2 Voice Category Button Options/Display-related settings [1] STYLE TEMPO Selects whether the default tempo of each Style is displayed above the Style name or not in the Style Selection display. [2] VOICE NUMBER Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number are shown in the Voice Selection display. This is useful when you want to check which bank select MSB/LSB values and program change number you need to specify when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device. NOTE The numbers displayed here start from “1.” Accordingly the actual MIDI program change numbers are one lower, since that number system starts from “0.” NOTE For the GS Voices, the Display Voice Number is not available (the program change numbers are not shown). [3] TIME STAMP Determines whether the time stamp of a file is shown on the USER/USB tabs of the File Selection display or not. NOTE When the instrument is connected to a network via the USB wireless LAN adaptor (UD-WL01), the current time is taken from the network and displayed. VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS Determines how the Voice Selection display is opened when one of the VOICE buttons is pressed. OPEN & SELECT Opens the Voice Selection display with the previously selected Voice in the Voice category automatically selected (when one of the VOICE buttons is pressed). Utility / System – Making Global Settings – [5]/ [6] OPEN ONLY Opens the Voice Selection display with the currently selected Voice (when one of the VOICE buttons is pressed). [7]/ [8] POPUP DISPLAY TIME Determines the time which elapses before the pop-up windows close. (Pop-up windows are displayed when you press buttons such as TEMPO, TRANSPOSE, etc.) 12 CVP-701 Reference Manual 103 PARAMETER LOCK Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [J] UTILITY → TAB [L][R] PARAMETER LOCK Utility / System – Making Global Settings – This function is used to “lock” specific parameters (effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel control — in other words, instead of being changed via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, or Song and sequence data. Use the [3] – [6] buttons to select the desired parameter, then enter or remove the checkmark by using the [7]/[8] (mark on) and [7]/[8] (mark off) buttons. USB You can set or execute important USB media-related operations for the instrument. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [J] UTILITY → TAB [L][R] USB 12 [A]/[B] DRIVE LIST Selects the desired USB flash drive for checking the remaining memory of (see “PROPERTY” below) or for formatting (see the Owner’s Manual). [F] PROPERTY Opens the Property display of the USB flash drive selected by [A]/[B] buttons, from which you can check the amount of remaining memory. NOTE The displayed remaining memory value is an approximate value. 104 CVP-701 Reference Manual [H] FORMAT Formats the USB flash drive selected by [A]/[B] buttons. Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 11. [3]/ [4] SONG AUTO OPEN Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off. When this is set to “ON” and the USB flash drive selected in the Drive List above is inserted, the instrument automatically calls up the first MIDI Song in the USB flash drive. OWNER [I] OWNER NAME Allows you to enter your name as the owner. The Owner name is indicated on the opening display when you turn the power on. Refer to the Owner’s Manual. [4]/ [5] LANGUAGE Determines the language used for the display messages. Once you change this setting, all messages will be shown in the selected language. [7]/ [8] VERSION Displays the version number of this instrument. Utility / System – Making Global Settings – Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [G] SYSTEM → TAB [L][R] OWNER 12 BACKUP/RESTORE Refer to the Owner’s Manual. CVP-701 Reference Manual 105 SETUP FILES For the items below, you can save your Original Settings as a Single File for future recall. 1 2 Utility / System – Making Global Settings – 3 Make all desired settings on the instrument. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [G] SYSTEM → TAB [L][R] SETUP FILES Press one of the [F] – [I] buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data. [F] SYSTEM SETUP FILES Parameters set on the various displays such as the [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [J] UTILITY are handled as a single System Setup file. Refer to the Data List for details on which parameters belong to the System Setup. [G] MIDI SETUP FILES The MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the USER tab display are handled as a single file. [H] USER EFFECT FILES The User Effect settings including the following data are managed as a single file. • User Effect Types .........................page 83 • User Master EQ Types ................page 85 • User Compressor Types...............page 86 12 • User Microphone Settings ...........page 67 [I] 4 5 6 106 MUSIC FINDER FILES All the preset and created records of the Music Finder are handled as a single file. Use the TAB [L][R] buttons to select one of the tabs (other than PRESET) to which your settings will be saved. Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save your file. To recall your file, press the desired [F] – [I] buttons in the SETUP FILES display, then select the desired file. If you want to call up the factory default files, select the file in the PRESET tab. When the file is selected, a message is displayed according to the content of the file. Press the desired button. CVP-701 Reference Manual RESET This function lets you restore the status of the instrument to the original factory settings. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [G] SYSTEM → TAB [L][R] RESET 2 1 Utility / System – Making Global Settings – Factory Reset (see below) Select the desired item to be restored by using [1] – [3] buttons and add a checkmark to it by pressing the [4]/[5] button. To remove the checkmark, press the [4]/[5] button. SYSTEM SETUP Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings. Refer to the Data List for details about which parameters belong to the System Setup. MIDI SETUP Restores the MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the USER tab display to the original factory status. USER EFFECT Restores the User Effect settings including the following data to the original factory settings. • User Effect Types......................... page 83 • User Master EQ Types................ page 85 12 • User Compressor Types .............. page 86 • User Microphone Settings........... page 67 2 MUSIC FINDER Restores the Music Finder data (all records) to the original factory settings. FILES & FOLDERS Deletes all files and folders stored in the USER tab display. REGIST Temporarily deletes the current Registration Memory settings of the selected Bank. The same can be done also by turning the power button ON while holding the B6 key (right-most B key on the keyboard). Press the [I] (FACTORY RESET EXECUTE) button to carry out the Factory Reset operation for all checkmarked items. CVP-701 Reference Manual 107 Index Numerics CHANNEL (Style Creator) ..24, 31, 32 E 1-16 ................................................ 50 Channel Events ..............................60 Echo Types ...................................... 9 4', 2 2/3', 2' ..................................... 17 Channel settings .............................41 EDIT (Registration Memory) ........... 74 CHANNEL TRANSPOSE ...............62 EDIT (Style Creator) ....................... 24 CHORD (Song Creator) ..................50 A Editing Records .............................. 72 CHORD DETECTION AREA ..........21 Editing Styles ................................. 24 ACCENT TYPE .............................. 31 CHORD DETECTION PRIORITY ...42 Editing Voices ................................ 12 Accompaniment ............................. 18 Chord Events ..................................64 EFFECT ......................................... 82 ACMP ON/OFF DEFAULT ............. 19 CHORD NOTE ONLY .......................9 Effect .............................................. 82 Ad Hoc Mode ................................. 93 CHORD ON/OFF ............................38 EFFECT/EQ ............................. 15, 17 ADD TO FAVORITE ...................... 71 CHORD SYS/EX. ...........................97 EG .................................................. 15 ADD TO MF ................................... 69 CHORUS ........................................82 EQ ............................................ 16, 84 AMPLITUDE .................................. 14 CHORUS DEPTH (Voice Set) ........15 EQUAL ........................................... 10 Any Key .......................................... 43 CHORUS DEPTH (VRM Voice) ........6 Equalizer ........................................ 84 APPEND ........................................ 73 CLOCK ...........................................96 EXPAND/COMP. ............................ 31 ARABIC1/2 ..................................... 10 Clock setting ...................................96 ASSEMBLY .............................. 24, 28 COLOR ...........................................39 ASSIGN ........................................... 9 COMMON .......................................13 F Assignable Pedal Functions ........... 89 Compressor ....................................86 Fade In/Out .................................. 100 ATTACK ......................................... 15 CONFIG1 ......................................100 FAST FORWARD TYPE ................ 42 AUTO CH SET ............................... 41 CONFIG2 ......................................102 FILES (Music Finder) ..................... 73 AUTO POWER OFF .................... 101 Connections ....................................88 FILES & FOLDERS ...................... 107 AUX IN NOISE GATE .................. 102 CONTROLLER .........................11, 88 FILTER (Mixing Console) ............... 81 CONTROLLER (Voice Set) ............14 FILTER (Voice Set) ........................ 14 Cool! .................................................4 FINE ............................................... 30 B Follow Lights .................................. 43 BACKUP/RESTORE .................... 105 Foot Controller ............................... 88 BANK ............................................. 74 D FOOTAGE ...................................... 17 BAR CLEAR ................................... 32 Footswitch ...................................... 88 BAR COPY .................................... 32 DAMPER RESONANCE DEPTH (VRM Voice) ..................................6 BASE NOTE .................................. 11 DECAY ...........................................15 BASIC ............................................ 24 DELAY (Vibrato) .............................15 BEAT CONVERTER ...................... 30 DELETE ............26, 51, 61, 63, 75, 77 BLOCK ........................................... 82 Delete (rhythm) ...............................27 BOOST/CUT .................................. 31 DEPTH (Vibrato) .............................15 BRIGHT (Brightness) ..................... 14 DRIVE LIST ..................................104 G BRIGHTNESS ................................ 81 DRUM KIT ........................................7 GM ................................................... 5 Drums ...............................................4 GROOVE ....................................... 24 DSP (Voice Set) .......................15, 16 GUIDE ............................................ 41 DSP1-4 (Mixing Console) ...............82 Guide .............................................. 43 DYNAMICS .....................................31 GUIDE/CHANNEL .......................... 41 C CANCEL (Music Finder) ................. 73 CENTER PEDAL ........................... 14 channel .................................... 38, 39 CHANNEL (Song Creator) ....... 50, 60 108 CVP-701 Reference Manual DYNAMICS CONTROL ..................19 FORMAT ...................................... 105 FREEZE ......................................... 76 Freeze ............................................ 76 FUNCTION ..................................... 14 H Metronome ................................... 101 PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT .................58 HARMO. (Harmonic content) ..........14 MIC SETTING ................................ 66 Performance Assistant ....................45 HARMONIC CONTENT ..................81 Microphone .................................... 66 PHRASE MARK REPEAT ..............41 Harmony .........................................16 MIDI Settings ................................. 94 PIANO ..............................................6 Harmony Types ................................8 MIDI SETUP ................................ 107 Pitch ..................................................9 headphones ..................................102 MIDI SETUP FILES ...................... 106 PITCH BEND RANGE ....................81 HIGH KEY ......................................37 MIX ................................................. 62 POPUP DISPLAY TIME ...............103 Mixing Console .............................. 79 PORTAMENTO TIME ...............13, 81 MODE ............................................ 17 PROPERTY ..................................104 I MODULATION (Voice Set) ............ 14 Punch In/Out ...................................57 I.A. CONTROL .............................102 MONO/POLY ................................. 13 PURE MAJOR ................................10 Infrastructure ..................................92 Multi Assign Type ............................. 9 PURE MINOR .................................10 MUSIC FINDER ........................... 107 PYTHAGOREAN ............................10 K Karao-Key ......................................43 KEY OFF SAMPLE ..........................7 Music Finder .................................. 69 MUSIC FINDER FILES ................ 106 Music Notation ............................... 38 Q QUANTIZE (Score) .........................39 KEY SIGNATURE ..........................39 QUANTIZE (Song Creator) .............61 KEYBOARD HARMONY ..................8 N QUANTIZE (Style Creator) .............32 KEYBOARD/PANEL .......................11 Natural! ............................................ 3 QUICK START ................................43 KIRNBERGER ................................10 NOTE ....................................... 39, 40 Note Events ................................... 64 L LANGUAGE .................................105 LEFT ...................................14, 38, 39 NOTE LIMIT ................................... 37 NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ...... 35 NTT (Note Transposition Table) ..... 35 LEFT PEDAL ..................................14 R Realtime Recording (Style Creator) .............................25 REC END (Punch Out) ...................57 REC MODE (Song Creator) ............50 LENG (Length) ...............................17 O REC START (Punch In) ..................57 LFO ................................................14 OCTAVE ........................................ 81 RECEIVE TRANSPOSE .................96 Live! ..................................................3 One Touch Setting ......................... 23 Recording (Song Creator) ...............49 Live! Drums ......................................4 Organ Flutes .................................. 17 Recording (Song) ............................46 Live! SFX ..........................................4 Organ Flutes! ................................... 4 Recording (Style Creator) ...............24 Local Control ..................................96 ORIGINAL BEAT ........................... 30 REGIST ........................................107 Loop Recording ..............................25 OTHERS ........................................ 41 REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE ......76 LOWER ..........................................21 OTS INFO ...................................... 23 Registration Memory .......................74 LYRICS (Score) ..............................39 OTS LINK TIMING ......................... 19 REGISTRATION SEQUENCE ........76 LYRICS (Song Creator) ..................50 Overdub Recording ........................ 25 Registration Sequence ...................78 Lyrics Events ..................................65 OWNER ....................................... 105 RELES. (Release) ..........................15 LYRICS LANGUAGE .....................42 OWNER NAME ............................ 105 REMOVE EVENT ...........................32 REPEAT MODE ..............................42 Repeat playback .............................41 M P REPERTOIRE ................................22 MANUAL BASS ..............................21 P.A.T. ............................................. 43 REPLACE .......................................73 MARK ON/OFF ..............................11 Pan ................................................. 79 RESET ..........................................107 Master EQ ......................................85 PARAMETER ................................. 24 RESP (Response) ..........................17 MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE ........9 PARAMETER LOCK .................... 104 REVERB .........................................82 MEAN-TONE ..................................10 PART OCTAVE .............................. 13 REVERB DEPTH (Voice Set) .........15 MegaVoice .......................................4 PART ON/OFF (Style Setting) ....... 20 REVERB DEPTH (VRM Voice) ........6 MegaVoices ......................................5 PART SELECT .............................. 11 Rhythm ...........................................18 MEQ ...............................................85 PEDAL ........................................... 88 RIGHT ................................14, 38, 39 MESSAGE SW (Message Switch) .......................96 Pedal .............................................. 88 RTR (Retrigger Rule) ......................37 CVP-701 Reference Manual 109 S SYNCHRO STOP WINDOW ..........20 VOICE NUMBER .......................... 103 S.Art! ................................................ 3 SYS/EX. (MIDI) ...............................96 VOICE SET .................................... 12 SAVE ......... 12, 27, 29, 63, 67, 84, 87, 106 SYS/EX. (Song Creator) .................50 Voice Set ........................................ 12 SYSTEM .......................................105 VOICE SET FILTER ....................... 16 Scale .............................................. 10 System ..........................................100 VOICE SETTING .............................. 6 SCALE TUNE ................................ 10 System Exclusive Events ................64 Voices .............................................. 3 SCORE .......................................... 38 SYSTEM SETUP ..........................107 VOL (Volume) ................................ 17 Score .............................................. 38 SYSTEM SETUP FILES ...............106 VOL/VOICE .................................... 79 SECTION SET ............................... 20 VOLUME (Harmony/Echo) ............... 9 SET UP (Score) ............................. 39 VOLUME (Metronome) ................. 101 SETUP ........................................... 50 T SETUP (Song Creator) .................. 59 TALK ...............................................66 SETUP FILES .............................. 106 Tap Percussion .............................101 SFX .................................................. 4 TEMPO (Style Setting) ...................20 Sing ................................................ 66 TIME SIGNATURE .......................101 SIZE ............................................... 39 TIME STAMP ................................103 Song ............................................... 38 TOUCH LIMIT ...................................9 W SONG AUTO OPEN .................... 105 TOUCH SENSE (Voice Set) ...........13 WERCKMEISTER .......................... 10 SONG CREATOR .......................... 50 Touch sensitivity .............................13 WIRELESS LAN ............................. 92 Song Creator .................................. 50 TRACK 1/2 .....................................41 Wireless LAN Settings .................... 92 Song Recording ............................. 46 TRANSMIT CLOCK ........................96 WPS ............................................... 92 SOUND (Metronome) ................... 101 TRANSPOSE .................................11 SOUND (Voice Set) ....................... 14 transpose ........................................11 SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/ CHORD ...................................... 34 TRANSPOSE (Mixing Console) ......81 SPEAKER .................................... 102 TUNING ..........................................81 Speaker ........................................ 102 tuning ................................................9 Y SPEED (Harmony/Echo) .................. 9 TUNING CURVE ..............................7 Your Tempo ................................... 43 TUNE ........................................11, 81 Volume (Mixing Console) ............... 79 VOLUME (Voice Set) ..................... 13 VOLUME/ATTACK ......................... 17 VRM ............................................. 3, 5 X XG .................................................... 5 SPEED (Vibrato) ............................ 15 SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING .. ..................................................... 21 U START/STOP (MIDI) ...................... 96 UPPER ...........................................21 Step Recording (Song Creator) ...................... 50, 54 USB ..............................................104 Step Recording (Style Creator) ...... 28 USER EFFECT FILES ..................106 STEREOPHONIC OPTIMIZER .... 102 UTILITY ........................................100 STOP ACMP .................................. 19 Utility .............................................100 USER EFFECT .............................107 STRENGTH ................................... 31 STRING RESONANCE DEPTH (VRM Voice) ................................. 6 V Style ............................................... 18 VELOCITY CHANGE ......................32 Style Assembly .............................. 28 VERSION .....................................105 STYLE CREATOR ......................... 24 VIB. SPEED ....................................17 Style Creator .................................. 24 VIBE ROTOR .................................15 Style File Format ............................ 33 VIBRATO ........................................15 Style Playback ............................... 18 VOCAL ...........................................66 STYLE SETTING ........................... 18 Voice (Mixing Console) ...................80 STYLE TEMPO ............................ 103 Super Articulation ........................... 89 VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS ..................................103 Sweet! .............................................. 4 Voice Characteristics ........................3 SWING ........................................... 30 VOICE EFFECT ...............................8 110 CVP-701 Reference Manual Manual Development Department © 2015 Yamaha Corporation Published 7/2015 MW-A0